JP2017104383A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises a movable member which can move to a front surface of display means. Performance control means displays a first operation promotion display for promoting a player to operate performance operation means, on the display means, when the operation of the performance operation means is promoted during execution of a variation performance, and displays a second operation promotion display for promoting the player to operate the performance operation means on operation display means, namely executes an operation promotion display, then executes an operation corresponding performance corresponding to the operation of the performance operation means. When a movement condition is established during execution of the operation promotion display, the movable member is moved to a position overlapping to the first operation promotion display, and executes the operation corresponding performance in response to the operation of the performance operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and executes a special game when it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the determination. .

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect of suggesting a jackpot expectation degree on the condition that an operation means such as an operation button is operated at a predetermined timing. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, an operation guidance image that prompts the player to operate the operation button is displayed on the display unit during the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button is effective, and the operation is performed during the operation effective period. Based on the operation of the button, a predetermined notice effect image is displayed on the display means.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-053973

  However, the gaming machines as described above have a problem that the production effect is poor and the entertainment of the game is poor.

  In view of the above background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

  The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is a special game that is advantageous to the player in accordance with the fact that the display means performs a variable display in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition and the special display result is derived as a result of the variable display. In the gaming machine to be in a state, a movable member movable to the front surface of the display means, a variation effect relating to the variation display, and an effect control for executing a movable effect relating to the movement of the movable member in accordance with the establishment of the movement condition And an effect operating means composed of an operation means operable by the player and an operation display means, wherein the effect control means is configured such that the effect operating means When prompting an operation, the display means displays a first operation promotion display that prompts the player to operate the effect operation means, and a second operation promotion display prompts the player to operate the effect operation means. After executing the operation promotion display to be displayed on the action display means, an operation corresponding effect according to the operation of the effect operation means is executed, and when the movement condition is satisfied during the operation promotion display, the first operation While moving the said moving member to the position which overlaps with a promotion display, the said operation corresponding | compatible effect is performed according to operation of the said operation means for effects.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a big win, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determining table for winning a small winner, (c) is a special symbol determining table for losing FIG. (A) is a figure showing a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure showing a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the first jackpot game, and (c) is a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the second jackpot game. (D) is a figure showing the 3rd big hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a small hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing the big winning game opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 1-30th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 31st-74th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 75th-84th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a regular variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. (E) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting opening-and-closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is a diagram of the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the time control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer effect process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart showing a specific effect type determination process in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure which shows an effect mode determination table, (b) is a figure which shows an effect mode flow. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B. It is a figure showing a normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C. It is a diagram showing a normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for timer effects matched with effect mode A. FIG. It is a diagram showing a timer effect variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of normal production mode A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode A for timer productions. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of normal production mode. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode B for timer production. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of normal production mode C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the special production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special production which can be performed in the variation production of production mode C for timer productions. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode D for normal use. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode D for timer effects. It is a figure which shows the specific production | presentation determination table for a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the specific production | presentation determination table for a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for losers. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the degree of jackpot expectation degree of a specific production. It is a flowchart which shows the specific image priority display process in an image control board. It is a figure which shows the priority of an image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the state of a normal effect button typically, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the state of the effect button at the time of a specific effect, (c) These are the figures for demonstrating typically the state in which the image output and the audio | voice output were performed at the time of specific production. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect control process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “this embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guidance member 29 </ b> D having a guidance path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Also, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. In addition, a second winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9 and 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a for detecting game balls. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 6 is provided below the image display device 14 at the lower part of the game area 2A and is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable large winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). In other words, the jackpot special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is determined.

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold A hold display device comprising a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10. In the normal symbol lottery, a winning random number value is acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10, and it is determined whether or not the acquired winning random number value is a random value corresponding to “win”. This is the process to do.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, even if a game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and the special symbol variation display is performed. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each of the start ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device is the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect accessory device 1701, the second effect accessory device 1702, and the third effect use. It is comprised with the accessory apparatus 1703. FIG. An image display device 14, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the effect lighting device are provided. 16 is provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The first effect accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. The second effect accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. The third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each effect accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Accordingly, the first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to “operation position 1-1” (the position of the center of the front surface of the image display device 14). Move to (position after movement). The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via “operation position 1-1”. To do. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” and then returns to “standby position 1”, or from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, a movement operation is performed such as returning to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum. 14 moves to “operation position 2” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 2” (original position). A moving operation such as returning is performed.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the third decorative member 17C falls to the right side from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the position on the lower left side of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum. It moves to “operation position 3” (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands on the left side with the lower side of the third decorative member 33c as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
Note that any of the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c is not limited to the shape and operation mode described here.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the tray 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a cross key device 190 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A as operable “first operation means”, an effect button operation detection switch 18a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 18A, and an electric motor 18b (FIG. 3). And an effect button light emitting diode 18c (see FIG. 3).

  The effect button 18A is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and incorporates a light-emitting diode 18c for effect button. When the effect button light emitting diode 18c emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A and is emitted to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

The effect button 18A includes a non-projecting state (FIG. 2 (a)) in which the effect button 18A is a normal operation position, and a protruding state (FIG. 2 (b)) that protrudes to an operation position above the non-projecting state. The state when the pressing operation is detected can be changed from the non-protruding state to a state of retreating downward (FIG. 2C).
In the non-projecting state, the effect button 18A is a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the tray 50.
Further, the effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) above the non-projecting state from the surface around the tray 50 in the protruding state.
In addition, the effect button 18A slightly retreats from the surface around the saucer 50 and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 18 has a structure in which the effect button 18A can be changed into a non-projecting state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the production button 18A in the non-projecting state or the projecting state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected. When the pressing operation is subsequently released, the pressed state returns to the non-projecting state.

  The direction in which the effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the protruding state, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is defined as the advancing / retreating direction of the effect button 18A.

  When the effect button 18A is in a state where a pressing operation is detected, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that a complete pressing operation of the effect button 18A has been detected to the lamp control board 104. To do.

  When the effect button 18A is in the protruding state, the effect button operation detection switch 18a transmits a protruding state detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A is held at the position where the effect button 18A protrudes to the maximum (the protruding state position). To 104.

  The effect button 18A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

  Furthermore, the effect lever apparatus 19 which functions as an input device for performing the operation which concerns on the various effects mentioned later is provided in the left end part of the glass door Y2.

  The effect lever device 19 includes an effect lever 19A as an operable “second operation means”, and an operation detection switch 19a for detecting an operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operation rod that can be gripped by the player and is attached so that it can be tilted up and down, and the operation detection switch 19a detects a downward tilt operation of the effect lever 19A.

  On the other hand, the cross key device 190 provided on the tray 50 is operated by pressing the cross key 190A as an operable “third operation means” and the upper left and lower right operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A. Cross key operation detecting switches 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the cross key, and cross key light emitting diodes 191b, 192b for causing the upper left, lower, right operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A to emit light. 193b, 194b (see FIG. 3).

  The operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, and 194A are formed of a transparent member that can transmit light, and each incorporates individual cross key light emitting diodes 191b, 192b, 193b, and 194b. When these cross key light emitting diodes 191b, 192b, 193b, 194b emit light, the light passes through the operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A and is radiated to the outside, and the operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are electrically connected. Decorated.

  In the present embodiment, an operation is performed on the effect button 18A as the “first operation means”, the effect lever 19A as the “second operation means”, or the cross key 190A as the “third operation means”. A valid state is referred to as an “operation valid state”. The sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute a predetermined effect by operating an operation means that enables the operation in the “operation effective state”. Examples of the “operation effective state” include an “operation effective state” which is a predetermined period set in advance, and an “operation effective state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The special effect symbol stop display is performed in response to the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, the special effect symbol change display and stop display are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative design that represents numbers). In the variation display of the special effect design, the special decoration design in each column moves (variation display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of special effect symbols is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the special effect design stop display, the above-mentioned three rows of special decoration designs are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal structure of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are detected via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 20-25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, a sub RAM 102c, and an RTC (real time clock) 102d. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

The RTC 102d measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 102d operates with this power when the power from the power supply board 107 is supplied to the gaming machine Y, and is built into the gaming machine Y when the power from the power supply board 107 is not supplied to the gaming machine Y. Timekeeping operation is performed by electric power supplied from a backup power source including a capacitor (not shown).
For this reason, the RTC 102d can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine Y is not powered on.

Note that a built-in battery may be provided in place of the backup power source, and the RTC 102d may be operated by power supplied from the built-in battery. By replacing the built-in battery, it is possible to increase the discharge capacity that can be stored as compared with the backup power supply. Therefore, the RTC 102d can maintain a sufficient life even with the built-in battery alone.
Even in this case, the RTC 102d performs a measurement operation with the power supplied from the power supply board 107 when the power of the gaming machine Y is supplied, and is built-in when the power of the gaming machine Y is not supplied. By performing the measurement operation with the battery, it is possible to extend the life compared to the case where only the built-in battery is used as the measurement operation power supply, and to the gaming machine Y while the power is supplied to the gaming machine Y. Since the measurement operation is more stable than when the power is not supplied, there is less time deviation.

  As will be described in detail later, the effect control board 102 acquires information indicating the current date and time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC information”) from the RTC 102d. In addition to the RTC 102d, the effect control board 102 includes a timer counter (not shown), and starts counting up after power from the power board 107 is started to be supplied to the gaming machine Y. As a result, the time from when the gaming machine Y is turned on can be measured. The effect control board 102 controls the timer effect different from the normal effect by acquiring the timer information from the timer counter. This timer effect corresponds to a specific effect.

  An effect button operation detection switch 18 a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104. To do. The lamp control board 104 outputs an effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a to the effect control board 102.

  When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs an effect lever operation detection signal indicating that the effect lever 19A has been tilted to the lamp control board 104. The lamp control board 104 outputs the effect lever operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the effect lever operation detection signal.

  The sub CPU 102a receives a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button operation detection signal output from the effect button device 18, an effect lever operation detection signal output from the effect lever device 19, and a timer (quartz crystal). Based on the input signal or the like, the program stored in the sub-ROM 102b is read and arithmetic processing is performed, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the arithmetic processing. . The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launching device 4. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a causes the LED 1821d of the effect button device 18 and the drive control for the electric motor 18b to move the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command. Perform light emission control.

  The effect button operation detection switch 18a and the effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a and the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the input detection signal to the effect control board 102. . That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button operation detection signal and the effect lever operation detection signal between the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the effect lever device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and sound output to the sound output device 15. A sound generation unit 105C that generates and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  4A and 4B are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second start port 7.

  Each of the jackpot determination tables is a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in a relatively high state (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the jackpot game with the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is “small win”, the small win game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, in the variation effect as the special drawing lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit. As a reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned special-figure decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. (A part of the production symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and if a predetermined special figure decoration symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, it becomes an arrangement of special figure decoration symbols representing the winning of the jackpot There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, there is a case where an effect (so-called “super reach production”) that enhances the expectation of winning the big win is developed or not. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit without reaching a reach state. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination.

  Each special symbol determination table stores a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the special effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variable display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310).

  The special effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

  Regarding the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second is displayed. The special symbol display device 21 indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect symbol designating command”, and the special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect symbol designating command”. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot game control table used when the jackpot game is controlled.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 6B to FIG. 6D are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game used when the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 is controlled. FIG. 6B is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is a period from the start of the small hit game until the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening The opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of the small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a big prize opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 is controlled. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8 are the round number (R), the special electric action number (K) that is the opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80), and the big prize. The opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the mouth 8 are set.

  FIG. 8A shows an example of a game condition data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is low (low probability game). Status). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start opening prize ease that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning ease after the jackpot game is set to easy (short time gaming state), and if it is “00H”, the starting port winning ease is difficult after the jackpot game (non-short time gaming state). ).

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag indicating the game condition (high probability flag and time-short flag) and the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of special symbol variable display according to the newly set game conditions. Note that the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of determinations for jackpot determination.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, the main CPU 101a, when executing the jackpot game, is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state) after the jackpot game ends. A specific gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state) is set.
The main CPU 101a ends the specific gaming state when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be performed) reaches 84 times in this specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state). Yes. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special symbol variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are diagrams showing examples of special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 1st to 30th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the special symbol variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is the 31st to 74th times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special variation pattern in the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when winning the third jackpot, or that is referenced when winning the small bonus Description of the special figure variation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) in the main ROM 101c and confirms the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the short time flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation display is confirmed, and the special figure fluctuation is determined according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuations. Select the pattern determination table.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 1 to 31 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 31 to 74 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table in FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 75 to 84 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, or when winning a small win, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device that operates in the special symbol display (the start port related to the special symbol display), and the special symbol The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining presence / absence of reach, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern are stored.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H”, or “20H”, “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired in response to entering the ball 7 is compared with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data. To decide.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (losing), the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure pending number (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination process. . The main CPU 101a obtains a random number for reach determination, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), or the special figure variation pattern of “unreach without reach”, Alternatively, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach”.

  Although the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the special figure hold number, when determining whether the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach without reach” or the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach” is determined. Does not refer to “4” as the number of reserved balls.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “unreach without reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “unreach without reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “losing with reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “losing with reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 102a determines the special symbol variation pattern by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”). The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  The main CPU 101 a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expected degree of reliability (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The degree of expectation (reliability) to be won is associated with the first jackpot and the second jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the contents of the effect based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as will be described later. In addition, in the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the variation effect effect type determined by the sub CPU 102 a is described in association with the special diagram variation pattern designation command as a reference. ing.

  Here, as the effect contents, here, “symbol variation” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special performance symbols that inform the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effects symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when the combination of special effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying the jackpot, the two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7”, and the remaining special effect symbols are displayed. It means an aspect in which the production symbol is changing. The “temporary stop” refers to an aspect in which the special effect symbol is changed to the player because the special effect symbol is slightly shaken or deformed.

  In the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 9, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are “lost” as the determination result of the jackpot determination without being in the reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that informs. The “symbol variation 1” is a “shortening variation” performed in a very short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. The “symbol variation 2” and “symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  In addition, the “normal reach” shown in FIG. 9 stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that performs a reach effect.

  Further, “normal reach → story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that variably displays a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, story reach is performed as a reach production with a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach. This story reach suggests that the decision result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the jackpot by going out on a journey to find the dog that disappeared in the following challenge reach, and finding the dog at the end It is a reach production consisting of a story of the contents.

  Further, “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit. This “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” stops the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special performance symbol after the “symbol variation 2” with the same numerical value (for example, 7), and also in the above story reach The character that appears appears to challenge a treasure hunt game in which a target item is searched from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character wins the item, suggesting that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a jackpot The content is challenged.

  Further, “symbol variation 3 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after “symbol variation 3”.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which a normal reach for stop display is performed, and then a super reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the normal reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which normal reach for stop display is performed, and then special reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a special reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first jackpot whose stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H0CH ”, the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot whose stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H07H ”, the selection ratio decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach” of “variation presentation pattern A034” to “variation presentation pattern A037”. And “E6H0BH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “Normal reach → Special reach” of “Change effect pattern A038” to “Change effect pattern A041” is changed. When “E6H0CH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” is determined. Decided to run To.

Later, variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” will be described as variation effects of effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
When the expectation degree for the big hit of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” is described, as can be seen from the selection ratio of “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, and “E6H0CH” described above. “Variation effect pattern A034” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Fluctuation effect of“ normal reach → special reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives“ E6H0BH ” As the “pattern A038” and “variable effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases.

  Further, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state have special diagram variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special symbol variation times are represented by “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time for execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the “special pattern variation pattern 30” for executing the “symbol variation 1” with the shortest special symbol variation time of 2 seconds is the special diagram variation time 4 shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of “special pattern fluctuation pattern 00” for executing “symbol fluctuation 1” in seconds.

  In addition, “symbol variation → special character reach 1” to “symbol variation → special character reach 6” shown in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B, which will be described later, after symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This is a fluctuating production with special character reach. Details of the special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80.

  In addition, in the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 11, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are variation effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed, and the variation effects corresponding to the special diagram variation time. The production time is different.

  In addition, “symbol variation → attack reach 1” to “symbol variation → attack reach 6” shown in FIG. 11 is an attack reach in which different characters attack each other after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special performance symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect to perform. Details of this attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special figure fluctuation pattern for executing an extremely short fluctuation effect such as a special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, "Janken production (losing 1)" to "Janken production (losing 6)", "Janken production (win 1)" to "Janken production (win 3)", "Janken production (Aiko 1)" ”To“ Janken production (Aiko 3) ”, after changing the symbol to display a plurality of special effect symbols, the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a fluctuating effect in which a “jenken effect” is performed, in which two characters (a friend character and an opponent character) perform a junk.

“Janken production (losing 1)” to “Janken production (losing 6)” are fluctuating productions that are executed when the jackpot determination result is a loss. Further, “Janken production (win 1)” to “Janken production (win 3)” are fluctuating productions executed when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is determined as the determination result of the jackpot determination. “Janken production (Aiko 1)” to “Janken production (Aiko 3)” are fluctuating production executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “third big hit” or “small hit”.
Details of this “Janken production” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 It shows that the special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the special symbol.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E7H” is “second”. This is called a “special pattern variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  FIG. 13A to FIG. 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As will be described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the passing of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the game ball.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-short gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, either “win” or “lost” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 13C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The common figure variation pattern determination table is composed of a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short-time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal variation pattern is determined by comparing the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal variation variation determination table. The

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the production control board 102 receives the normal symbol variation pattern designation command, the normal symbol variation display is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination relating to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is recognized. it can.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 13D is a diagram illustrating an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 13E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13F is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game involving the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is “big hit game” and “small hit” which are executed when “big hit” is won. It is composed of “small hit game” that is executed when winning. The jackpot game is divided into a “first jackpot game”, a “second jackpot game”, and a “third jackpot game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, jackpot winning probabilities and start port winning easiness are set as game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-short-time gaming state, the time required for the normal symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure change time) is set to 15 seconds, and is activated when “winning” is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operation time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is 1 / It is set to 50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times per win, and a game ball can be won per win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, the jackpot game type (first to third jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state or high probability game state, non-short game state, by winning the jackpot Or a combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (gaming state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game with the number of rounds of 16R (round) is executed (first jackpot game), and then set to the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is called "first jackpot" By winning, a jackpot game with a round number of 4R (round) ("second jackpot game") is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability game state and a short-time game state is called "second jackpot" A jackpot game in which a jackpot game with a round number of 2R (round) ("third jackpot game") is executed and then set to a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state is referred to as a "third jackpot".

  If the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that this initialization processing has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special prize opening control device 80. Special symbol special electric power control processing (special symbol system processing) for performing the above control (control of special symbol system device). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing.

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose power transmission processing data in the normal-time normal power control processing (ordinary symbol system processing) and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose power transmission processing data. If the processing data = 0, the normal symbol determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is to be executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gates 9 and 10 is performed. Normal symbol memory determination processing is performed, and if the normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, the normal symbol change processing when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating is performed based on the normal symbol determination, If normal power processing data = 2, normal symbol stop processing is performed when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped. If general power normal processing data = 3, the second start port 7 is controlled to open / close (first control). (2) Auxiliary game to be started) Carry out the management.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counters corresponding to the starting port (the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7), the big winning port 8 and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the big prize opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving 80B (start opening / closing solenoid drive data and big prize opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25 Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 20, 21, and 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, and 25, display device output processing for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a are input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process ends. If there is a valid detection signal, the start opening prize counter is updated by adding “1” in step S232, and the first start opening entering the main RAM 101c is updated. The first start port winning flag is turned ON in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S234, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in the main RAM 101c in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter as the first special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs the first preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening entrance ball regulation counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. The second starting entrance ball flag is turned ON in the winning flag storage area. The second starting entrance counting rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting entrance 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter as the second special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  Note that the second special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313).

  In step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second pre-determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a, 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S253.

  In step S 253, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the usual figure holding number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. Exit.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which no random number is stored. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310) If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process shifts to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reserved storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of entering, or the first special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may let them.

  In Step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the processing is shifted to the customer waiting state setting processing in Step S319-1 to Step S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first start port 6, the first special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. “Big jackpot determination table” or “Second low probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is compared with the “decision table” or the “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot”, “small jackpot”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination process ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning in step S312-3. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”. If it is determined that the “small hit” is determined, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4. If the main CPU 101a does not determine “small hit”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5 (a)). The special symbol to be determined is determined.

  In step 312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit special symbol by comparing the random number for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning a small bonus (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step 312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5B) to determine the special symbol for loss. Perform special symbol determination.

  In step S312-6, a special effect symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designating command is effected. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop” based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5. In other words, the special symbol type is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process of FIG. When determining “special symbol” or the like, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 28 or the small hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table corresponding to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is collated with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data and store it in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation time”) and A special-figure variation pattern including information related to an effect type or the like of a variation effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of the high probability flag and ON / OFF of the short time flag in the gaming condition determination table of FIG. Gaming state or low-probability gaming state, short-time gaming state or non-short-time gaming state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S313-3, and other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. If it is a gaming state, the process proceeds to step S313-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol to be started (from 1 to 30 times, from 31 to 74 times, from 75 to 84 times). Confirm).

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines that the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation display confirmed in step S313-3.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is “losing”, the main CPU 101a further performs the special symbol related to the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), and the special chart of “no reach loss”. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a performs special figure variation pattern determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a special figure variation pattern determination random number, and acquires the acquired special figure variation pattern determination random number and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special diagram variation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the special CPU variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, a special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special graphic variation pattern is transmitted for production in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming condition at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting port winning flag or the second starting port winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Move processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the hourly flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, when it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, and when it is not determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special symbol special electricity processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the gaming condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), the remaining variation counter for the high-probability gaming state, and the remaining variation counter for the time-short gaming state. To do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. The main CPU 101a sets the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the big prize opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), the opening time ( Set the special game timer counter). The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all preset round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, it determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and moves the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hit game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, in order to open the special winning opening 8, the energization start data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special operation is performed with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means the period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, nine), or the opening time of one time of the big winning opening 8 has passed (special game timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the large winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to. Based on the current special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special winning action number (K) is set to the number of times the special winning opening 8 is set in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special operation number storage area and sets “0” to the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending time according to the type of small hits. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special electricity processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag (01H) is set in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition state, sets a game state designation command indicating the current game condition state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-7 0 is set in the figure special electricity processing data, and the process proceeds to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S <b> 1002, the sub CPU 102 a performs a process of updating the effect random number used for controlling the effect including the random effect determination random number, the variable effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for performing time management related to various effects. Details of this time control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1210, the sub CPU 102a performs a timer effect process for performing an effect (timer effect) based on the timer information. Details of the timer effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process. Details of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Time control processing)
The time control process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1201, processing for updating each timer counter is executed. Next, in step S1202, timer information acquisition processing for acquiring timer information from the timer counter and storing it in the sub RAM 102c is executed. The timer information stored in the sub RAM 102c is rewritten to the newly acquired timer information every time the process of step S1202 is performed.

(Timer effect processing)
The timer effect process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1211, the sub CPU 102a confirms the time elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y from the timer information acquired in step S1202, and determines whether it is a timer effect start time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the timer information is a predetermined counter value (whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the game machine Y was turned on). The timer effect start time is a predetermined time set in advance, and is set, for example, every predetermined time. In this embodiment, the timer effect start time is set in advance every two hours, such as when 59 minutes and 50 seconds have elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y, and when 2 hours and 59 minutes and 50 seconds have elapsed. In this embodiment, the timer presentation start time is set as a time measured from when the gaming machine Y is turned on, but using the RTC 102d, it is a predetermined time, a predetermined day of the week, or a date. It is good also as a timer production start time. Further, the production start time may be set at random instead of every predetermined time. If the current time is the timer effect start time, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1212. If the current time is not the timer effect start time, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1214.

  In step S1212, the sub CPU 102a executes processing for turning on the timer effect flag in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S <b> 1213, the sub CPU 102 a performs timer effect advance notice processing for performing an effect of informing that the timer effect is started. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a sets a timer effect notice control command in the transmission buffer. The timer effect start time effect advance notice control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When receiving the timer effect advance notice control command, the image control board 105 displays, for example, “10 seconds until the Tono-sama time starts” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and counts down the number of seconds. Further, the image control board 105 displays the opening effect of the timer effect for 5 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 immediately after the timer effect notice.

  In step S1214, the sub CPU 102a confirms the time elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y from the timer information acquired in step S1202, and determines whether it is the timer effect notice end time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the timer information is a predetermined counter value (whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the game machine Y was turned on). The timer effect notice end time is a predetermined time, and in this embodiment, when the power-on of the gaming machine Y is 1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds elapsed, 3 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds elapsed, etc. The timer effect notice end time is set 10 seconds after the timer effect start time. If the current time is the timer effect notice end time, the process proceeds to step S1215. If the current time is not the timer effect notice end time, the process proceeds to step S1216.

  In step S <b> 1215, the sub CPU 102 a performs a process of outputting a music for timer effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a sets a timer effect dedicated BGM control command in the transmission buffer. The timer effect dedicated BGM control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1500. Then, when receiving the timer effect dedicated BGM control command, the image control board 105 performs control to output the timer effect dedicated BGM, which is a music for timer effect, from the audio output device 15. As a result, while the timer effect is being performed, the timer effect-dedicated BGM is always output regardless of whether the special symbol is changing or the jackpot game.

  In step S1216, the sub CPU 102a confirms the time elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y from the timer information acquired in step S1202, and determines whether it is the timer effect end time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the timer information is a predetermined counter value (whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the game machine Y was turned on). The timer production end time is a predetermined time, and in the present embodiment, the timer effect is such that 1 hour 05 minutes 00 seconds, 3 hours 05 minutes 00 seconds have elapsed since the game machine Y was turned on. The timer effect end time is set 5 minutes after the effect notice end time. If the current time is the timer effect end time, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the current time is not the timer effect end time, the timer effect process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the timer information is checked to measure the time from when the gaming machine Y is turned on, and it is determined whether the timer effect start time, the timer effect notice end time, and the timer effect end time. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the timer effect start time, the timer effect notice end time, and the timer effect end time are set to predetermined times, and the timer effect start time, the timer effect notice end time, and the timer effect end time are set using the RTC 102d. You may make it judge.

  In step S1217, the sub CPU 102a executes processing for turning off the timer effect flag stored in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1218, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for stopping the output of the timer effect dedicated BGM. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a sets a timer production dedicated BGM end control command in the transmission buffer. When receiving the timer effect dedicated BGM end control command, the image control board 105 performs control to stop the output of the timer effect dedicated BGM output from the audio output device 15. When this process ends, the timer effect process ends.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
A command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, it moves the process to step S1303. If it determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as pre-processing for executing the demonstration effect, and also waits for the demonstration effect to start (demo effect standby). Time) is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs start opening prize designation command storage processing. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in an effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the starting opening prize designation command storage process.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the start opening winning designation command, and the type of the starting opening. Is stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to the.

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of the start ports 6 and 7. The start opening winning designation command is sequentially stored from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

  Each storage unit stores a start opening prize designation command section that stores a starting opening prize designation command, and effect data for effects performed based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the starting opening prize designation command section. And an effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures the special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol stop display is being performed, and for performing the special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. In the special effect design pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect design designation command and displays the special effect in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the information included in the received special effect design designation command. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display of symbols, that is, special effect symbols is determined.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1311. If it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and the variable effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (the special effect symbol variation display). The variable effect pattern determination process for determining the variable effect pattern is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1313 and step S1314. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Move processing.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Upon receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variable effect has ended, end the variable effect, and stop display of the special effect symbol. . Note that the end time of the production is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event on the production during the variation production.

  In S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the data for presentation stored in the sub RAM 102c described later.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a performs an effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode in response to the end of the special symbol variation display, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variable display). It is related to the state of the game condition and the like.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1318. If it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1320. If it determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  Here, the variation effect pattern determination table used in the later-described variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37) will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current gaming state and A process for determining a variation effect pattern is performed from the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the current state of the timer effect flag.

FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b and associated with effect mode A set in a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, which will be described later.
FIG. 43 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with effect mode B that is set in a special probability variation number of 1 to 30 times in a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 44 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode C that is set in the special probability variation number of times 31 to 74 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 45 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode D that is set in the special probability variation number 75 to 84 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state described later. Show. 42 to 45 are normal variation effect pattern determination tables used when the timer effect is not performed.
FIG. 46 is a variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A and stored in the sub ROM 102b, and is used when a timer effect is performed.
FIG. 47 is a variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D stored in sub-ROM 102b, and is used when a timer effect is performed.

  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 42 to 47 include special symbol determination results (decision results of jackpot determination), special diagram variation pattern designation commands from the main control board 101, and variations corresponding to the special diagram variation time. Based on the production time (s) of the production, the fluctuation production pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the fluctuation production pattern, the fluctuation production pattern determined according to the fluctuation production pattern judgment value, and the fluctuation production pattern The contents of the fluctuation effects and the presence / absence of execution (execution (◯), non-execution (×)) of each special effect in the fluctuation effects based on the fluctuation effect pattern are stored in association with each other.

(Normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
The normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state in FIG. 42 has an expectation as to whether or not to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. In order to give to the player, as a variation production pattern with different expectations for winning the first or second jackpot, a variation production pattern that executes super reach after execution of normal reach, and a variation that executes special reach after execution of normal reach There are production patterns and variable productions in which super reach is executed after normal reach is executed and then special reach is executed.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not to win the third big hit or the small win, a variation production pattern in which a story reach is executed after execution of a normal reach, and a variation production pattern in which a challenge reach is executed after execution of a normal reach And have.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A in FIG. 42, when “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. One of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-”). 3 ”), a fluctuating effect for informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A004” to “variation presentation pattern A006” is determined. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol variation A2-1” to “symbol variation A2-3”). "), A fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A007” to “variation presentation pattern A009”. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A007” to “variation effect pattern A009” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol variation A3-1” to “symbol variation A3-3”). ), A fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H03H” or “E7H03H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A010” to “variation presentation pattern A012” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A010” to “variation effect pattern A012” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost Production.

  When “E6H07H” or “E7H07H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A022” to “variation presentation pattern A025” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A022” to “variation effect pattern A025” display a variety of special effect symbols (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( ("Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H08H” or “E7H08H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A026” to “variation presentation pattern A029” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A026” to “variation effect pattern A029” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When “E6H09H” or “E7H09H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A030” to “variation presentation pattern A033” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A030” to “variation effect pattern A033” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, the variation variation pattern A034 to the variation variation pattern A037 are selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A038” to “variation presentation pattern A041” Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A042” to “variation effect pattern A045” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") Is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H10H” or “E7H10H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern A058 to the variation variation pattern A060 is selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A058” to “variation effect pattern A060” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Characters that appear in the challenge reach as described above after performing normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left and right symbols) with the same numerical value. Going on a journey to find a domestic dog that disappeared, and finally finding a domestic dog, a story reach consisting of a story that suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("story reach A1-1" ”To“ Story Reach A1-3 ”), and it is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot .

  As described above, the variation effects of “variation effect pattern A061” to “variation effect pattern A063” are a challenge to a treasure hunt game in which a character searches for a sword of a target item from a plurality of treasure boxes after “symbol variation 2”. Then, it is suggested that the character wins an item and that the result of the jackpot determination indicates that the result is a third jackpot or a jackpot ("challenge reach A1-1" to "challenge reach A1-3"). This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  Fluctuation effects of “Variation effect pattern A064” to “Variation effect pattern A066” are obtained by challenging the treasure hunt game where the character searches for a cloak of a target item from a plurality of treasure boxes after “symbol variation 3”. Depending on the item to be played, a challenge reach ("Challenge Reach A2-1" to "Challenge Reach A2-3") is performed to suggest that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result is the third big hit or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, the “variation effect pattern A001” to the “variation effect pattern A075” include “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A”, “decision” as special effects. Information indicating execution (◯) and non-execution (×) of “effect A” is associated.

  Here, as will be described later, the “line notice” is a jackpot game by displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image in which a character described later speaks one of a plurality of lines having different expectations for the jackpot. Is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” of “Selif Notice A” is executed as “Selif Notice”.

  In addition, the “character notice”, as will be described later, notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying any image of a plurality of characters having different expectations for the jackpot on the image display device 14. This is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” of “character notice A” is executed as “character notice”.

  As described later, “development notice” refers to the state of the effect button 18A (non-projecting state or protruding state) or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. In addition to notifying the possibility of developing from the current performance to a higher next performance with a high expectation for the jackpot, the possibility of executing the jackpot game is notified, and the expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot It is a notice effect to give. In the production mode A, as will be described later, “Development Notice A1” or “Development Notice A2” of “Development Notice A” is executed as “Development Notice”.

  In addition, the “decision effect” is an effect for notifying the determination of a big hit, as will be described later. When the first big hit or the second big win is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of losing, the first decoration member 17A is not operated. In effect mode A, as will be described later, “determined effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “determined effect A” is executed as “determined effect”.

As shown in FIG. 42, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “fluctuation effect pattern A034”, the execution of “Selif notice A”, “Character notice A”, and “Development notice A” (○), “Decisive effect” Information indicating non-execution (×) of “A” is associated.
If the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-5 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “subject notice A” and “character notice A” as special effects in step S1311-7. Confirm that “Development notice A” is executed.

The variable effect performed in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, which is easier to win a big win than the low-probability game state and the non-short-time game state, is a simple effect that is not overwhelmed by the notice effect.
In addition, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, a maximum of 84 variation effects are performed in a special mode variation number 1 to 30 times and a special diagram variation number 31 times so as not to be redundant. Different effects are performed in the effect mode C performed at 74 times and the effect mode D performed at 75 to 84 special figure fluctuations.

(Normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variation effect pattern included in the normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 43 is a high probability game state and a short time in which the winning probability of jackpot is higher than the above-described low probability game state and non-time-short game state. It is a variation effect pattern of a variation effect that is executed at a special figure variation frequency of 1 to 30 times in a gaming state.

  In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a sense of expectation that it will be easy to win a jackpot. Therefore, in the production mode B, in order to give the player a sense of expectation that a big win will be won in a short period with a small number of special figure fluctuations, The production of the fluctuation is simpler than the production.

  In the effect mode B, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure fluctuation time is longer than that in the effect mode A so that the fluctuation effect of the next special figure fluctuation frequency is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a variation effect pattern of 2 seconds and a variation effect at a high rate. In addition, when the special effect design is changed to reach, only the “special character reach” is executed so that characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 43, when the special symbol determination result is lost, “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command. The “variation effect pattern B001” or “variation effect pattern B002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern B001” and “variation effect pattern B002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation B1-1”, “symbol variation B1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variable rendering pattern B003” or “variable rendering pattern B004” is determined. The When “E6H32H” or “E7H32H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variable rendering pattern B005” or “variable rendering pattern B006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B003” to “variation effect pattern B006” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”, “symbol variation B3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation B3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H33H” or “E7H33H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern B007” or “variation effect pattern B008” is determined. Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H34H” or “E7H34H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B009” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B010” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H35H” or “ When "E7H35H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern B011" or "Variation effect pattern B012" is selected. When the special figure change pattern designation command "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern" When “B013” or “Variation effect pattern B014” is determined and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H37H” or “E7H37H” is determined, “Variation effect pattern B015” or “Variation effect pattern B016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern designation command “E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B007” to “variation effect pattern B018” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”, “symbol variation B2-1”). ”,“ Symbol Variation B2-2 ”), and then a special character reach in which a special character appears (“ Special Character Reach B4-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B4-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-2, Special Character Reach B6-1, Special Character Reach B6-2, Special Character Reach B1-1, Special Character Reach B1-2, Special Character Reach B2- 1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B2-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B3-1 ”, and“ Special Character Reach B3-2 ”), and a variable performance that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost It is.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B019” or “variation effect pattern B020” is determined. The Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern B023 "or" variation effect pattern B024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B019” to “variation effect pattern B024” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”). Special character reach ("Special Character Reach B1-1", "Special Character Reach B1-2", "Special Character Reach B2-1", "Special Character Reach B2-2", "Special Character Reach B3-1" , “Special Character Reach B3-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is "E6H3FH" or "E7H3FH" is determined as JP diagram variation pattern designation command when the third jackpot, "variation demonstration pattern B031" or "variations demonstration pattern B032" is determined The Similarly, in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H40H" or "E7H40H" is determined "variation demonstration pattern B033" or "variations demonstration pattern B034", JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H41H" or "E7H41H "Is determined," variation effect pattern B035 "or" variation effect pattern B036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B031” to “variation effect pattern B036” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”). Special Character Reach ("Special Character Reach B4-1", "Special Character Reach B4-2", "Special Character Reach B5-1", "Special Character Reach B5-2", "Special Character Reach B6-1" , “Special Character Reach B6-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, the “variation effect pattern B001” to the “variation effect pattern B042” are executed as a special effect of “development notice B” and “decision effect B” (◯), not executed ( X) is associated with the information.

For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern B019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice B” is executed (◯) and “decision effect B” is not executed (×).
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern B019” in step S1311-5 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, it confirms that “development notice B” is executed as a special effect in step S1311-7. To do.

(Normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variation effect pattern included in the normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C in FIG. 44 is a variation effect that is performed after the number of times of special figure variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is 31 to 74 times. This is a variation production pattern.

  In the effect mode C, there is a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change frequency 1 to 30 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the production mode C as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “special character reach” of the production mode B in the special figure variation times 31 to 74 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Has a variation production pattern of “attack reach” in which an attack is made.

  44, when “E6H50H” or “E7H50H” is determined as the special pattern variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, as shown in the variation rendering pattern determination table associated with the rendering mode C in FIG. The “variable effect pattern C001” or “variable effect pattern C002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C001” and “variation effect pattern C002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation C1-1”, “symbol variation C1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H51H” or “E7H51H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C003” or “variable rendering pattern C004” is determined. The When “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C005” or “variable rendering pattern C006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern C003” to “variation effect pattern C006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If “E6H53H” or “E7H53H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern C007” or “variation effect pattern C008” is determined. Similarly, if the Japanese view variation pattern specification command "E6H54H" or "E7H54H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C009" or "variations demonstration pattern C010" is, JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H55H" or " If the E7H55H "is determined, when" fluctuation demonstration pattern C011 "or" variations demonstration pattern C012 "is the Japanese diagram variation pattern specification command" E6H56H "or" E7H56H "is determined," fluctuation effect pattern C013 "or" variations demonstration pattern C014 ", if the Japanese view variation pattern specification command" E6H57H "or" E7H57H "is determined, the" fluctuation demonstration pattern C015 "or" variations demonstration pattern C016 ", Japanese view change Pattern designation command “E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C007” to “variation effect pattern C018” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), and then an attack reach (“ attack reach C4-1 ”,“ attack reach C4-2 ”,“ attack reach C5-1 ”), where a predetermined character attacks. “Attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “attack reach C6-2”, “attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack Reach C2-2 ”,“ Attack reach C3-1 ”, and“ Attack reach C3-2 ”), and a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C019” or “variation effect pattern C020” is determined. The Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern C021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern C022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern C023 "or" variation effect pattern C024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” to “variation effect pattern C024” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C3-1”, “symbol variation C3-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack reach C2-2”, “attack reach C3-1”, "Attack reach C3-2"), and it is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is "E6H5FH" or "E7H5FH" is determined as JP diagram variation pattern designation command when the third jackpot, "variation demonstration pattern C031" or "variations demonstration pattern C032" is determined The Similarly, in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H60H" or "E7H60H" is determined "variation demonstration pattern C033" or "variations demonstration pattern C034", JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H61H" or "E7H61H "Is determined," variation effect pattern C035 "or" variation effect pattern C036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C031” to “variation effect pattern C036” displays a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C4-1”, “attack C4-2”, “attack reach C5-1”, “attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “ The attack effect C6-2 ") is performed to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, a variation effect similar to the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, the “variation effect pattern C001” to the “variation effect pattern C042” are executed (O) or non-executed as special effects as “advance notice C” and “decision effect C”. Information indicating (x) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern C019” is associated with information indicating the execution (◯) of “development notice C” and “determination effect C”.
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern C019” in step S1311-5 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice C” and “determination effect C” are used as special effects in step S1311-7. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variation effect pattern included in the normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 45 is a variation effect that is performed after 75 to 84 times of the special figure variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. This is a variation production pattern.

  In the effect mode D, there is a change effect pattern of a change effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change times 31 to 74 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, it appears only in the production mode D as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “attack reach” of the production mode C in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state in the special figure fluctuation frequency 31 to 74 times. The character that performs the janken has a variation effect pattern of “Janken production” with the content of performing the janken a predetermined number of times with the character that is the opponent of the janken. With such a variation effect of the janken effect, the player can be expected to win a big hit with the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state with a small remaining number of times.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. 45, when “E6H70H” or “E7H70H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. If any of “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D003” is determined, and “E6H71H” or “E7H71H” is determined, “variation effect pattern D004” to “variation effect pattern D003”. If any one of “pattern D006” is determined and “E6H72H” or “E7H72H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D007” to “variable effect pattern D009” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D009” are “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”, “symbol” which displays a plurality of special effect symbols. ”Difference D2-1” to “Symbol Variation D2-3” and “Symbol Variation D3-1” to “Symbol Variation D3-3”) This is a fluctuating effect in which an effect (contention character, opponent character) performs a single janken, an effect that the teammate character loses, and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When “E6H73H” or “E7H73H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any one of “variable rendering pattern D010” to “variable rendering pattern D012” is determined. Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D013” to “variable effect pattern D015” is determined, and the special figure variation is determined. When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D018” is a variation effect in which “Janken Reach” is executed after “symbol variation” and the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D012” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "rock-paper-scissors twice to win it !!" a notification to two character (friend of the character, the character of the opponent) wins the character of ally perform the first round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, then of "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( performs a rendition of content that ally of character loses in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3"), change the determination result of the jackpot determination is to inform the user that is a loss Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D013” to “variation effect pattern D015” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-3") in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors wins character of ally in, make the production of content that ally of character is lose in the third round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, jackpot judgment This is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result is lost.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "rock-paper-scissors four times to win it !!" a notification to two character (friend of the character, the character of the opponent) wins the character of ally perform the first round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, then of "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1" - the second in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-3"), the third round eyes ally of character wins at rock-paper-scissors, make the production of content that in the fourth round eyes of rock-paper-scissors ally of character loses This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D019” to “variation effect pattern D021” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( performs a rendition of content that is also an ally of character to win in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3"), change the determination result of the jackpot determination is to inform the user that is a big hit Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D022” to “variation effect pattern D024” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1" - the second in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-3"), the production of content that ally of character will win in succession in the third round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, the determination result of the jackpot determination is in the jackpot This is a fluctuating effect to notify that there is.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D025” to “variation effect pattern D027” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second round to the fourth round of Janken will produce the content that the ally character wins continuously, and the jackpot determination result is a big hit It is a fluctuating effect that informs that it is.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H7CH” or “E7H7CH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern D037 to the variation variation pattern D039 is selected. any is determined, any of the "fluctuation demonstration pattern D040" - "fluctuation demonstration pattern D042" in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H7DH" or "E7H7DH" is determined is determined, special symbol When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D037” to “variation effect pattern D039” are “pattern variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to “Janken Reach D1-3”) This is a fluctuating effect informing that the result is a third big hit or a small hit.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D040” to “variation effect pattern D042” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D2-1" to "Janken Reach D2-3") The ally character wins in the second round of janken, and the ally character and the opponent's character in the third round of kenken are "Aiko" This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content is performed and the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot is informed.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second and third rounds of janken win the teammates in succession. This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content that becomes “Aiko” is performed and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

“Variation effect pattern D001” to “Variation effect pattern D054” are associated with information on execution (O) of “development notice D”, “character notice D”, and “decision effect D” as special effects. Yes.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern D019” is associated with information indicating execution of “development notice D” (◯) and execution of “decision effect D” (◯).
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern D019” in step S1311-5 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice D” and “character notice D” are provided as special effects in step S1311-7. Then, it is confirmed that “decision effect D” is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 to 45, in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B is executed when the number of times the special symbol changes is 1 to 30 times. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the effect mode C in the effect mode C that is executed with the number of changes of 31 to 74 times than the change effect, and the number of changes is 35 to 84 than the change effect in the effect mode C. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the change effect of the effect mode D executed in a single time.

(Change effect pattern determination table for timer effect associated with effect mode A)
The timer effect changing effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state in FIG. 46 is used when the timer effect is performed. The timer effect is an effect that is compulsorily performed at a predetermined time. In this embodiment, the timer effect dedicated BGM is output during the timer effect, and the dedicated effect is performed in the variable effect. Is called. The timer effect is performed when the timer effect flag is ON at the time of the remaining variable effect after the end of the timer effect opening effect and at the start of the variable effect, and the timer effect flag is started as described above. The timer is turned on from the time (for example, when 59 minutes and 50 seconds have elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y) to the timer effect end time (for example, when 1 hour, 5 minutes, and 00 seconds have elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine Y). Therefore, the variable effect pattern determination table for the timer effect is referred only from the timer effect start time to the timer effect end time.

  At the time of the timer effect, the variation effect pattern is determined in the same way as at the normal time, but the content of each effect is different from that at the normal time. That is, when referring to the normal variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A of FIG. 42 and when referring to the timer effect variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A of FIG. Then, although the variation effect pattern is determined at the same rate, the effect contents of the variation effect determined with reference to the timer effect variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A in FIG. Is a different dedicated production. In addition, the execution / non-execution information of special effects is also associated as in normal times, but the contents of each special effect (serial notice, character notice, development notice, and decided effect) are also dedicated to timer effects. It has become.

  As described above, the timer effect is an effect that is performed when the timer effect flag is ON at the time of the remaining variable effect period and the start of the variable effect after the opening effect of the timer effect ends. Is executed for 10 seconds from the timer effect start time regardless of the change effect, and the opening effect of the timer effect is executed for 5 seconds immediately after the timer effect notice regardless of the change effect. In the present embodiment, the ending effect of the timer effect is also executed. The ending effect of the timer effect is executed in the change effect after the change effect by the timer effect ends. In the present embodiment, a timer effect start image is displayed in the timer effect opening effect, and a timer effect end image is displayed in the timer effect ending effect.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect for the timer effect is displayed at the top left of the screen as “Tono-sama time”, informing that it is a timer effect, and “rear character” is displayed in the center of the screen. When the “character” looks back and becomes “Tono-sama”, the jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, “Tono-sama time”, which is a timer-dedicated effect, is an effect that makes the player expect that “Tono-sama” will appear.

(Time variation effect pattern determination table for timer effects associated with effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D)
47. The timer effect variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D set in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state in FIG. 47 is used when performing the timer effect. That is, the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 46 is referred to only when the high probability game state and the short time game state and the time from the timer effect start time to the timer effect end time.

  As with the variation effect pattern determination table for the timer effect associated with the effect mode A, the change effect pattern is determined in the same way as in the normal time, but the content of each effect is dedicated to the timer effect different from the normal time. Has become. In addition, the execution / non-execution information of the special effects is also associated as in the normal case, but the content of each special effect is also dedicated to the timer effect. If a power interruption occurs during the execution of the timer effect, after the power interruption is restored, the effect during the fluctuation effect is displayed as “restoring the power interruption”, and the timer effect is resumed from the next fluctuation effect. It will be.

(Type of each special production)
FIG. 48 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 42 and 46. FIG. 49 is a table that the sub CPU 102a changes according to the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. FIG. 50 is a table that is referred to when the effect pattern is determined, and FIG. 50 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern using the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 46, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. Yes.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode A”. FIG. 48A is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, the execution ratio (%) of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” as “Serial notice A” is set, and “Character notice A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is set, the execution ratio (%) of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6” as “Development notice A” is set, and “ The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” as “decided effect A” is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A at the normal time. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 49 (c) is a diagram showing an “development advance notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development advance notice A” in the production mode A. FIG. 49 (d) is a diagram showing a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in effect mode A.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of effect mode A at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in the effect mode A at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in the effect mode A at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 50C is a diagram showing an “development advance notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development advance notice A” in the effect mode A at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 50 (d) is a diagram showing a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in effect mode A at the time of timer effect.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 49 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table. Further, when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 46, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 50 is executed is shown in FIGS. Based on the execution ratio shown in the table of b), it is determined by lottery.

  The “line notice A1” at the normal time (when the timer effect is not performed) is to display an effect image of “line a1” “Ichigo Senkinja!” On the image display device 14. In this “line notice A1” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X11 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, an effect image (“Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Ichigo Senkinja!” As “Serif a1” ( 72 (see (a-1-4) in FIG. 72)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” to the “operation position 3” as a movable member. Perform the corresponding performance.

  “Selif notice A2” at the normal time is to display an effect image of “Serif a2” on the image display device 14 “whether a hundred cars have been acquired?”. In the normal “line notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X11 described later), the effect button The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 18A is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the press button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect that “Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Is it possible to acquire one hundred cars” as “Serif a1”? A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 73) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The normal “Selif Notice A3” is the same as the normal “Selif Notice A2” except that the effect image of “Serif a3” “Do you have acquired both?” Is displayed on the image display device 14. is there.

  The normal “line notice A4” is normal except that the operation valid period is not set and an effect image of “line a4” “whether one car is acquired?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. The content of the production is the same as “Serif notice A2” at the time.

  The normal “Serif notice A5” is normal except that the operation valid period is not set and an effect image of “Serif a5” “Do you earn money?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. The content of the production is the same as “Serif notice A1” at the time.

  “Timeline notice A1”, “line notice A2”, “line notice A3”, “line notice A4”, and “line notice A5” for timer production differ from normal times, and in this embodiment, no special production is performed. . Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “Selif Notice A”, the execution rate of “Selif Notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and “Selif Notice A1” in the case of a loss in the case of a jackpot or the like. Is the highest execution rate. That is, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is highest in “Serif notice A1” and decreases as it becomes “Serif notice A2” to “Serif notice A5”. In “Serif Notice A”, the execution ratio of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” is set.

  In the normal time, “Selif Notice A” is a “Selif Notice A1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and “Selif Notice in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. A2 ”to“ Serial notice A5 ”. In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. The execution rate of “Serif Notice A2” to “Serif Notice A5” is higher than the execution rate of “Serif Notice A1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “line advance notice” effect in the effect mode A in the normal low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting is executed. On the other hand, in the variation production of the production mode A, when the jackpot etc., the ratio of the “character notice A1” in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is high. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A.

  “Character notice A1” at normal time is to display the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice A1” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y11 described later), the operation promotion Notification is not performed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 72) of “character a2-1” described later is displayed on the image display device. 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A2” at the normal time is to display the effect image of “Character a2-2” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice A2” at the normal time, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y11 described later), the operation promotion is performed. The notification is not executed, and the state of the effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, an effect image of “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 73) described later is obtained based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A3” at the normal time is other than displaying the effect image of “Character a2-3” (see (c-2-4) in FIG. 74) on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-2”. Is the same as “Character notice A2” at the normal time.

  “Character notice A4” at normal time does not set an operation valid period, and an image of the effect image of “Character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed instead of “Character a2-2” at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying on the device 14, the content of the effect is the same as the “character notice A2” in the normal state.

  “Character notice A5” at normal time does not set an operation valid period, and instead of “Character a2-2”, an effect image of “Character notice a2-5” (not shown) is displayed as an image at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying on the device 14, the content of the effect is the same as the “character notice A2” in the normal state.

  The “character notice A1” at the time of the timer effect is to display an effect image of “a character in the back” (timer effect character) on the image display device 14. In the “character advance notice A1” at the time of the timer presentation, the presentation lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y31 described later) An operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the lever 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “Tono-sama” ((c-2-4) in FIG. 75) or the effect image of “侍” (FIG. 75). (C-2-5)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect is executed. In this corresponding effect, in the case of a big hit or the like, an effect image of “Tono-sama” is displayed at a rate of 90%, and an effect image of “侍” is displayed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the effect image of “侍” is displayed at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the “character notice A1” at the time of the timer production, if the production image of “Tono-sama” is displayed based on the tilting operation with respect to the production lever 19A, it becomes a big hit confirmation notice, and the production of “侍” When the image is displayed, it is notified that the possibility of the loss is high.

  “Character notice A2”, “Character notice A3”, “Character notice A4”, and “Character notice A5” for the timer effect do not perform any special effects in this embodiment, and the effect images of “the character in the back” are displayed. It is only displayed on the image display device 14. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “Character notice A”, the execution rate of “Character notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and “Character notice A1” in the case of a loss in the case of a big hit. Is the highest execution rate. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is highest in “Character notice A1” and decreases as “Character notice A2” to “Character notice A5”. , Execution ratios of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” are set.

  In the normal state, “Character notice A1” includes “Character notice A1” that displays the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A, and the pressing operation of the effect button 18A. Is based on “Character notice A2” to “Character notice A5” for displaying effect images of “Character a2-2” to “Character a2-5” on the image display device 14. When the ratio is higher than the big hit or the like, the ratio at which “character notice A2” to “character notice A5” in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the effect lever. It is higher than the rate at which “character notice A1” in which a character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “character notice A” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time game state, the proportion of the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A is It is higher than the rate at which the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of 19A is executed. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing “character notice A1” in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and based on the operation of the effect button 18A. The effect of displaying the character image based on the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of displaying the character image.

  The “development notice A1” at the normal time is to display the effect image of “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In the “development advance notice A1” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X12 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 72) is displayed on the image display device 14. At the same time, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  The “development notice A2” at the normal time is to display the effect image of “effect a2” on the image display device 14. In the normal “development notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X12 described later), the effect button The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 18A is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect a2” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the second decorative member 17B as a movable member. A corresponding effect such as moving “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  The “evolution notice A3” at the normal time is a display of an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) instead of “effect a1” on the image display device 14 except that the movable member is not operated. The development content is the same as “Development notice A1”.

  The “development notice A4” at normal time makes the effect button 18A in a non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and the operation button 18A is pressed from the start 0.0 second to 0.5 second of the operation effective period If not, as the initial operation of the operation means, the second decorative member 17B is moved from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2-1,” and overlapped with the first operation promotion display of the effect button device 18, As the content of the corresponding effect, an effect image of “effect a4” is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”. Other than that, the production contents are the same as the “development notice A2” during normal times.

  The “evolution notice A5” in the normal time is a display of an effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) instead of the “effect a1” on the image display device 14 except that the movable member is not operated. The development content is the same as “Development notice A1”.

  In the normal development advance notice A6, the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a2.” Except that the movable member is not operated, the contents of the production are the same as the “development notice A2” at the normal time.

  The “development notice A1” at the time of the timer effect is to display the effect image of “effect a1” on the image display device 14, and the effect image of “small castle” is displayed as the image display device as the timer effect super reach A1-1. 14 except for display on the screen 14, the contents of the production are the same as the “development notice A1” at the normal time. That is, in the “development advance notice A1” at the time of the timer production, the production lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and in the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X32 described later) An operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed (see (c-3-2) in FIG. 75). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect a1” (see (c-3-4) in FIG. 75) is displayed on the image display device 14. At the same time, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  The “development notice A2” at the time of the timer effect does not give a special effect in the present embodiment, and an effect image of “small castle” is displayed on the image display device 14 as the timer effect super reach A1-1. (See (c-4-3) in FIG. 75).

  The “development notice A3” at the time of the timer effect is the “effect a3” instead of the “effect a1” after the effect image of “small castle” is displayed on the image display device 14 as the timer reach super reach A1-1. The effect image is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated, and the effect content is the same as the “development notice A3” in the normal time.

  The “development notice A4” at the time of the timer effect does not give a special effect in the present embodiment, and the effect image of “small castle” is displayed on the image display device 14 as the timer effect super reach A1-1. (See (c-3-3) in FIG. 75).

  The “development notice A5” at the time of the timer effect is the “effect a2” instead of the “effect a1” after the effect image of “small castle” is displayed on the image display device 14 as the timer effect super reach A1-1. The effect image is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated, and the effect content is the same as that of the “development notice A5” at the normal time.

  The “development notice A6” at the time of the timer effect does not perform any special effect in the present embodiment, and the effect image “small castle” is displayed on the image display device 14 as the timer effect super reach A1-1. (See (c-4-3) in FIG. 75).

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, the “development notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpots of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “development notice A1”. The execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set so as to become lower as it becomes “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.

  In the normal state, “Development notice A” is an “Promotion notice A1”, “Development notice A3”, “Development notice A5” in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and an operation prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. It consists of “development notice A2”, “development notice A4”, and “development notice A6” in which the promotion notification is executed. In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. “Development notice A1”, “Development notice A3”, “Development notice A5” are executed when the execution ratio of “Development notice A2”, “Development notice A4”, and “Development notice A6” is executed to prompt the operation of the effect lever 19A. Is higher than the execution rate. Therefore, in the “development notice” effect in the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the operation that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variation production of the production mode A, when the jackpot or the like, the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production lever 19A is executed, but the rate of execution is high, and the operation of the production button 18A is performed. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the expectation of jackpot (reliability) than the effect of prompting the user.

  The “decision effect A1” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 ((b-3-3 in FIG. 73). 3)). In the “decided effect A1” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect A2” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image “flash” a2 on the image display device 14 ((b-3-3 in FIG. 73). 3)). In the “decided effect A2” at the normal time, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the effect button The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 18A is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image “flash” a2 is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect A1” at the time of the timer effect moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 ((c-4 in FIG. 75). -2)), and the same content as the “decided performance A1” in normal times. That is, in the “determination effect A1” at the time of the timer effect, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X33 described later), An operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “determination effect A2” at the time of the timer effect does not perform any special effect in the present embodiment, and only displays the effect image of “Big Castle” on the image display device 14 ((c in FIG. 75). -4-3)). Then, after an elapse of a predetermined period, the effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decoration member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2”. Perform the production.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “decision effect A”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decision effect A1” and “decision effect A2” is “determined” than “decision effect A2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” is set so that “effect A1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect A1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  In the normal time, the “decision effect A” includes “decision effect A1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and “decision effect A2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. ]. In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of “decided effect A2” is higher than the execution ratio of “decided effect A1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode A that is the low-probability gaming state and the non-temporal gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the operation promotion that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which notification is executed. On the other hand, when the “decision effect” in the effect mode A is a big hit or the like, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, but the execution rate is high, and the effect button 18A. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of prompting the operation.

  Thus, comparing FIG. 49 with FIG. 50, “Selif notice”, “Character notice”, “Development notice”, and “Decisive effect” in FIG. 49 indicate the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Although the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation can be executed, only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed in the “line notice,” “character notice,” “development notice” and “decision effect” in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, in the normal effect mode A, both the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. On the other hand, in the effect mode A at the time of the timer effect, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is not executed.

  51 is a table to which the sub CPU 102a refers when the variable effect pattern is determined by the variable effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 43 and 47. FIG. 52 is a table in which the sub CPU 102a is changed by the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. FIG. 53 is a table that is referred to when the effect pattern is determined, and FIG. 53 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern using the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. Yes.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode B”. FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 51 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, execution rates (%) of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” as “development notice B” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect B1” and “decided effect B2” is set.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B at the normal time. FIG. 52 (a) is a diagram showing an “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” at the normal time in the production mode B. FIG. 52B is a diagram showing a “determined effect B information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” at the normal time in the effect mode B.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the changing effect of the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect. . FIG. 53A is a diagram showing an “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” at the time of the timer effect in the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 53 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect B information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” at the time of timer effect in effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43 or 47 in the effect mode B, any of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 52 or FIG. Whether to execute is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the tables of FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b).

  “Development notice B1” at the normal time (when the timer effect is not performed) is to display the effect image of “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B1” at the normal time, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 79). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once in the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 79) is displayed on the image display device 14. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the screen is executed.

  The “development notice B2” at the normal time is to display the effect image of “effect b2” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41, which will be described later) that enables the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed during the operation effective period. This is executed (see (d-2-2) in FIG. 79). Then, the effect image of “effect b2” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 79) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19 </ b> A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  The “development notice B1” at the time of the timer performance is different from the normal time, and no special performance is performed in the present embodiment. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  “Development notice B2” at the time of the timer effect is to display the effect image of “effect b2” on the image display device 14 as in the normal time. At the time of the timer presentation “development notice B2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X32 described later) that enables the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed (see (c-3-2) in FIG. 75). Then, an effect image of “effect b2” (see (c-3-4) in FIG. 75) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 51A and 51B, in “Development Notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” is “Development Notice B2”. The execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set to be higher than “B1”.

  In the normal time, the “evolution notice B2” includes “development notice B1” in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice B2” in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. In the production mode B that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and the short-time gaming state, the percentage of lost is considerably higher than the percentage of jackpot etc. The execution rate of “development effect B2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect B1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode B in the high probability game state and the short time game state in the normal time, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the production mode B, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the operation of the production lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  The “decision effect B1” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 ((e-3- of FIG. 80). 4)). In the “determination effect B1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 73). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect B2” at the normal time moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 ((e-3- of FIG. 80). 4)). In the “determination effect B2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 80). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  The “determination effect B1” at the time of the timer effect is different from the normal time, and no special effect is performed in the present embodiment. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  The “decision effect B2” at the time of the timer effect moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and displays the effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 in the same manner as the “decision effect B2” at the normal time. (See (c-3-4) in FIG. 75). In the “determination effect B2” at the time of the timer effect, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later) An operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the lever 19A is executed (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 75). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 51A and 51B, in “decision effect B”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is “determined” than “decision effect B1”. The execution ratio of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is set so that “effect B2” is higher. That is, the “decision effect B1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  In the normal time, “decision effect B” includes “decision effect B1” in which an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect B2” in which an operation promotion notification to urge the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. Then, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the normal production mode B, the execution rate of the “decision production B2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the performance ratio of the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “decision effect B1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation is executed. Therefore, in the normal “decision effect” of the effect mode B in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode B, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  Thus, when FIG. 52 is compared with FIG. 53, the “development notice” and the “decision effect” in FIG. 52 are the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the performance button 18A or the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the performance lever 19A. Although “execution notice” and “decision effect” in FIG. 53, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. Therefore, in the normal effect mode B, both the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. On the other hand, in the production mode B at the time of the timer production, both the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the performance lever 19A can be executed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the performance button 18A is not executed.

  FIG. 54 is a table to which the sub CPU 102a refers when the variation effect pattern is determined by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 44 and 47, and FIG. 55 is a table in which the sub CPU 102a is changed by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. FIG. 56 is a table that is referred to when the effect pattern is determined. FIG. 56 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. Yes.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode C”. FIG. 54A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 54 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the execution ratio (%) of “Development Notice C1” and “Development Notice C2” as “Development Notice C” is set, and “Decision Effect C” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect C1” and “decided effect C2” is set.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effects that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode C at the normal time. FIG. 55A is a diagram showing an “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the normal time in the production mode C. FIG. 55B is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in the effect mode C in the normal state.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of the effect mode C at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice C” at the time of timer production in the production mode C. FIG. 56B is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” at the time of timer effect in effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 44 or 47 in the effect mode C, any of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 55 or FIG. Whether to execute is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the tables of FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b).

  The “development notice C1” at the normal time (when the timer effect is not performed) is to display the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 82) on the image display device 14. In this “development notice C1” at the normal time, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X71 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed (see (g-2-1) in FIG. 82). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 82) is displayed on the image display device 14. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the screen is executed.

  The “development notice C2” at the normal time is to display the effect image of “effect c2” on the image display device 14. In the normal “development notice C2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X71 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed (see (g-2-2) in FIG. 82). Then, an effect image of “effect c2” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 82) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  The “development notice C1” at the time of the timer effect does not perform any special effect in the present embodiment, and only displays the effect image of “small castle” on the image display device 14 ((c in FIG. 75). -4-3)).

  The “development notice C2” at the time of the timer effect is to display the effect image of the “effect c2” on the image display device 14 as in the normal time. In this “time advance notice C2” at the time of the timer production, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X32 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed (see (c-3-2) in FIG. 75). Then, an effect image of “effect c2” (see (c-3-4) in FIG. 75) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  54 (a) and 54 (b), in “Development Notice C”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice C1” and “Development Notice C2” is “Development Notice C2”. The execution ratio of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is set to be higher than “C1”.

  In the normal time, the “advance notice C2” includes an “advance notice C1” in which an operation promotion notice for urging the user to operate the effect button 18A is executed, and an “advance notice C2” in which an operation promotion notice to urge the user to operate the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. In the production mode C that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and the short-time gaming state, the proportion of loss is considerably higher than the proportion of jackpot etc. The execution rate of “development effect C2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode C in the high probability game state and the short time game state in the normal time, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the production mode C, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the operation of the production lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  The “decision effect C1” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 ((g-3- of FIG. 82). 4)). In the “decision effect C1” at the normal time, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X72 described later), the effect button The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 18A is executed (see (g-3-2) in FIG. 82). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed on the “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect C2” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and display the effect image of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 ((g-3- of FIG. 82). 4)). In the “decision effect C2” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means that is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed (see (g-3-3) in FIG. 82). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash c2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  The “determination effect C1” at the time of the timer effect is different from the normal time, and no special effect is performed in the present embodiment. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  The “decision effect C2” at the time of the timer effect moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and displays the effect image of “flash” on the image display device 14 in the same way as the “decision effect C2” at the normal time. (See (c-3-4) in FIG. 75). In the “determination effect C2” at the time of the timer effect, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and in the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later) An operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the lever 19A is executed (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 75). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash c2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 54A and 54B, in “decision effect C”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” is “determined” than “decision effect C1”. The execution ratio of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” is set so that “effect C2” is higher. That is, the “decision effect B1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  In the normal time, the “decision effect C” includes “decision effect C1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect C2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. Then, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, and in the normal production mode C, when the game is lost, the execution rate of the “decision production C2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed. This is higher than the execution rate of the “decision effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the normal “decision effect” of the effect mode C in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  Thus, comparing FIG. 55 with FIG. 56, the “promotion notice” and the “decision effect” in FIG. 55 are the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Although it can be executed, in the “development notice” and “decision effect” in FIG. 56, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. Therefore, in the normal production mode C, both the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance button 18A and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance lever 19A can be executed. On the other hand, in the effect mode C at the time of the timer effect, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is not executed.

  FIG. 57 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 45 and 47. FIG. 58 is a table that the sub CPU 102a changes according to the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. FIG. 59 is a table that is referred to when the effect pattern is determined, and FIG. 59 is a table that is referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the change effect pattern using the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. Yes.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode D”. FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 57 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, execution rates (%) of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” as “development notice D” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D at the normal time. FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing an “development notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice D” at the normal time in the rendering mode D. FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing a “character notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice D” at the normal time in the effect mode D. FIG. 58 (c) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” at the normal time in the effect mode D.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D at the time of the timer effect. FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an “development notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice D” at the time of timer production in the production mode D. FIG. 59B is a diagram showing a “character notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice D” at the time of the timer effect in the effect mode D. FIG. 59 (c) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” for storing setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” at the time of timer effect in effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 45 or 47, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 58 or 59 is executed is shown in FIG. Based on the execution ratio shown in the tables of a) and (b), it is determined by lottery.

  The “development notice D1” at the normal time (when the timer effect is not performed) is to display the effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 84) on the image display device 14. In this “development notice D1” at the normal time, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed. Then, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed based on one press operation on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period.

  The “development notice D2” at the normal time displays an effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 84) on the image display device 14. In the normal “development notice D2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period. Promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying the effect image of “effect d2” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the “development notice D1” at the time of the timer effect does not give a special effect, and only displays the effect image of “small castle” on the image display device 14 ((c in FIG. 75). -4-3)).

  The “development notice D2” at the time of the timer effect is to display the effect image of the “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 84) on the image display device 14 as in the normal time. In the “development notice D2” at the time of the timer production, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X32 described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged during the operation effective period. Operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying the effect image of “effect d2” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the “development notice D2” indicates that the “development notice D2” is the “development notice D2” and the “development notice D2” is the “development notice D2”. The execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set to be higher than “D1”.

  In the normal time, the “advance notice D2” includes an “advance notice D1” in which an operation promotion notice for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and an “advance notice D2” in which an operation promotion notice for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. In the production mode D that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and in the short-time gaming state, the percentage of lost is considerably higher than the percentage that is a big hit, and is lost in the production mode D. In this case, the execution rate of the “development effect D2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect D1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. high. Therefore, in the normal “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” at the normal time in the production mode D, when the ratio is a big hit or the like that is lower than the loss, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed becomes high. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A.

  “Character notice D1” in the normal time is to display the effect image of “Character d1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice D1” at the normal time, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y101 described later), the operation promotion is performed. The notification is not executed (see (j-4-1) in FIG. 84). Then, an effect image of “character d1” described later (see (j-4-3) in FIG. 84) is displayed on the basis of one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice D2” at the normal time is rendered as “Character notice D1” at the normal time except that the effect image of “Character d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”. The contents are the same.

  “Character notice D3” at normal time is to display the effect image of “Character d3” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice D3” at the normal time, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period Y101 described later), the operation is promoted. The notification is not executed (see (j-4-1) in FIG. 84). Then, based on the fact that the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “Character d3” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The “character notice D1” and “character notice D2” for the timer effect do not perform any special effects in the present embodiment, and the effect display image of the “rear character” (timer effect character) is displayed on the image display device 14. It is only displayed on. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  The “character notice D3” at the time of the timer effect is to display the effect image of “the character in the back” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice D3” at the time of the timer effect, the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means that the operation becomes effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y31), the effect lever 19A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “Tono-sama” ((c-2-4) in FIG. 75) or the effect image of “侍” (FIG. 75). (C-2-5)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect is executed. In addition, in this corresponding effect, when the effect image of “Tono-sama” is displayed based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A in the “character notice A1” at the time of the timer effect, a big hit is confirmed. When the effect image “侍” is displayed, it is notified that the possibility of the loss is high.

  In the tables of FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), in “Development notice D”, “Character notice D1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

  In the normal state, “Character notice D1” and “Character notice D2” in which operation promotion notifications for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A are executed, and operation promotion notifications for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A are executed. "Character notice D3". In the normal mode of the production mode D, which is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the execution rate of the “development production D3” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation rate of the production button 18A It is higher than the execution ratio of “Character notice D1” and “Character notice D2” in which the operation promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the normal “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” at the normal time in the production mode D, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the production lever 19A The effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect that prompts the operation.

  The “decision effect D1” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image of “flash d1” on the image display device 14 ((j-4- of FIG. 84). 6)). The “decided effect D1” at the normal time is one in which the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the effect button The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 18A is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect D2” at the normal time is to move the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and display the effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 ((j-4- of FIG. 84). 6)). The “determination effect D2” at the normal time is such that the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash d2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “determination effect D1” at the time of the timer effect is different from the normal time, and no special effect is performed in the present embodiment. Therefore, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is not executed.

  The “decision effect D2” at the time of the timer effect moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and displays an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 in the same way as the “decision effect D2” at the normal time. (See (c-3-4) in FIG. 75). The “determination effect D2” at the normal time is such that the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the effect lever The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash d2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 57A and 57B, in the “decided effect D”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is “decided” than the “decided effect D2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set so that “effect D1” is higher. That is, in the “decided effect D”, in the case of a loss, the “decided effect D2” is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect D1”. Each execution ratio is set so as to be executed at a higher ratio than the “effect D2”.

  In the normal state, the “decision effect D” includes “decision effect D1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect D2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. ]. In the normal state of the production mode D that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the execution rate of the “decision production D2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation rate of the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “decision effect D1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting is executed. Accordingly, in the normal “decision effect” in the effect mode D in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged to operate the effect button 18A. It is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decision effect” at the normal time in the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the effect lever 19A The effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect that prompts the operation.

  Thus, comparing FIG. 58 with FIG. 59, the “development notice”, “character notice”, and “decision effect” in FIG. 58 indicate the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation of the effect lever 19A. The prompting operation prompt notification can be executed, but only the operation prompt notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed in the “development notice”, “character notice”, and “decision effect” in FIG. Therefore, in the normal effect mode D, both the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. On the other hand, in the effect mode D at the time of the timer effect, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is not executed.

  It should be noted that, in the normal time, for the “development notice” and “decision effect” in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D, the jackpot expectation is different. That is, among the “development notice B1” executed in the effect mode B at the normal time, the “development notice C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “development notice D1” executed in the effect mode D, The jackpot expectation (reliability) of “notice D1” is the highest, and the expectation of jackpot becomes lower as it becomes “development notice C1” and “development notice B1”. Among the “decided effect B1” executed in the effect mode B in the normal time, the “decided effect C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “decided effect D1” executed in the effect mode D, The jackpot expectation (reliability) of the effect D1 is the highest, and the jackpot expectation decreases as the “decision effect C1” and “decision effect B1”. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, it can be said that the jackpot expectation by the effect using the effect button 18A increases as the effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D progress.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) during the operation effective period in which the operation with respect to the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) is validated as a special effect in the figure variation effect. The corresponding effect is executed based on the above.

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher period (first period) in the specific gaming state at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the period of (1), an operation effective period is set during the variation effect.

  That is, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the changing 31st to 74th times) in the effect mode C than in the changing effect (the changing times 1 to 30). In addition, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the 75th to 84th changes) in the effect mode D than the changing effect in the effect mode C.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a later period (in the specific gaming state) at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the first period), an operation effective period in which the effect button 18A as the operation means for enabling the operation is set to the projecting state which is the second state is set.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102a is in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A at a higher rate than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the jackpot expectation than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. . On the other hand, in the case of a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state), a higher proportion of special effects using the operation of the effect lever 19A than a special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A Run with. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the big hit expectation is higher in the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A than in the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variation effect pattern determination processing by effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, thereby setting the current mode set in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 39) described later. The production mode is confirmed, and the variation production pattern determination table associated with the current production mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the timer effect flag stored in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and the timer effect flag is set. When it is OFF and normal, and when it is confirmed that the current effect mode is “effect mode A”, the variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A shown in FIG. 42 is selected. If the timer effect flag is ON and the timer effect is in effect, and it is confirmed that the current effect mode is “effect mode A”, the change effect pattern determination associated with the effect mode A shown in FIG. 46 is determined. Select a table.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the timer effect flag stored in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and performs the timer effect. When it is confirmed that the flag is OFF and the normal time and the current effect mode is “effect mode B”, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect time mode B shown in FIG. select. If the timer effect flag is ON and the timer effect is in effect, and it is confirmed that the current effect mode is “effect mode B”, the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the timer effect flag stored in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area. When it is normal time and it is confirmed that the current effect mode is “effect mode C”, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C at normal time shown in FIG. 44 is selected. . If it is confirmed that the present time is a timer effect and the current effect mode is “effect mode C”, the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the timer effect flag stored in the timer effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area. When it is normal time and it is confirmed that the current effect mode is “effect mode D”, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D at the normal time shown in FIG. 45 is selected. . Also, when it is confirmed that the present time is the timer effect time and the current effect mode is “effect mode D”, the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is selected.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, in each effect mode, one or more variable effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special figure change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern is identification information representing the effect contents of the variation effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variation effect.

  The variation effect pattern is associated with the elements of the variation effect, such as the time of the change effect, the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the contents of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In addition, in the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14, the display mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also components of the variation effect. It is associated.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random effect pattern determination random number. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect storage pattern random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a collates the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area in step S1311-3 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby changing the variation effect pattern. The process of determining is performed.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a performs information indicating execution (O) and non-execution (x) of the special effect associated with the variable effect of the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4 (FIG. 42 to FIG. 42). 47), it is determined whether or not the special effect is executed in the determined variation effect of the variation effect pattern. If the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-6. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-9.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, if the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the sub CPU 102a executes “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” as special effects in step S1311-6. Then, it is confirmed that the “decision effect A” is not executed (see FIG. 42).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process proceeds to step S1311-9. If it is determined that the process has not ended, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines “variable effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the execution ratio corresponding to the special effect type determination table in effect mode A in FIG. “Selif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” is determined as the type of “Serial Notice A1”, and “Character Notice A1” to “Character Notice A5” is determined as the “Character Notice A” type. Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for jackpot using vibration of the effect button 18A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, and determines whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the specific effect determination random value. judge. In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not performed when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is the normal effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H04H”, it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50% (◯), and the specific effect is not executed at a rate of 50% (×). When the special figure change pattern designation command is “E6H0CH”, it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 80% (◯), and the specific effect is not executed at a rate of 20% (×).

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not it is determined in step S1311-9 that the specific effect is executed (O). If it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (◯), the process proceeds to step S1311-1. If it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed (x), the process proceeds to step S1311-1.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any one or a combination of vibration of the effect button 18A, pseudo sound output of the sound that the effect button 18A vibrates, and display of an image that the effect button 18A vibrates. In addition, the vibration of the effect button 18A is performed in one of two types of low speed vibration and high speed vibration.

  The specific effect type determination process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1311-11-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the vibration speed determination random value to set the vibration speed to “low speed”. ”Or“ Fast ”. As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), the effect button 18A can vibrate. The “high speed” is a vibration speed at which vibration is transmitted to the player when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating. On the other hand, “low speed” means that, as described above, when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the player as “Poco… Poco…”. The vibration speed.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, “high speed” is determined at a rate of 50%, and “low speed” is determined at a rate of 50%. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is determined as “high speed” at a rate of 90% and “low speed” at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the rate at which the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be “high speed” rather than “low speed” is higher than in the case of loss. Further, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot is, the more the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the more the speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be "high speed" than "low speed". The percentage of the Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the effect of high jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is “high speed” than when the vibration speed is “low speed”. If “high speed” is determined in this step, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed when the specific effect is executed, and if “low speed” is determined, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a low speed when the specific effect is executed. .

  In step S1311-11-2, the sub CPU 102a executes a sound output determination process for determining whether or not to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect sound output determination table shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, and uses the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the sound output determination random value to determine the presence or absence of sound output. decide. The voice output means that the voice output device 15 outputs a voice such as “Poco Poko Poko Poko” or “Poko... Poko...” That is a vibration sound of the presentation button 18A during execution of the specific presentation.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute voice output at a rate of 50% (◯), and not to execute voice output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. Also, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute voice output at a rate of 90% (◯), and not to execute voice output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a jackpot, the rate of executing sound output (◯) is higher than in the case of losing. In addition, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot expectation content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the higher the proportion of execution of sound output (◯) becomes. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the effect of outputting the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is an effect having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the effect of not outputting the sound.

  In step S1311-13-1, the sub CPU 102a executes image output determination processing for determining whether to output simulated image data of the effect button 18A that vibrates in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination table shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, and determines the presence / absence of image output using the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the random number for determining image output. To do. The output of an image is to display on the image display device 14 an image that simulates the appearance of the effect button 18A vibrating during execution of the specific effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 50% (◯) and not to execute image output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 90% (◯) and not to execute image output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of (○) to perform image output is higher than in the case of losing. Further, the higher the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the higher the jackpot expectation degree effect, the higher the (○) rate at which image output is executed. Therefore, when executing the specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is an effect that has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the effect that does not output the image.

  Thus, sub CPU102a determines the production | generation aspect in a specific effect by performing the process of step S1311-11-1 to step S1311-1-11. The vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A that vibrates are determined according to the degree of expectation of jackpot. That is, in the specific effect, whether the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” or “low speed”, whether a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the audio output device 15, or an effect on the image display device 14. Whether or not an image representing the button 18A is displayed indicates the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68, the jackpot expectation is increased step by step by the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A. It has become different.

  Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation of the specific effect shown in FIG. 68, the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” in the specific effect, and a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output. When the image of the effect button 18A is displayed, it is an effect that suggests the highest degree of jackpot expectation. On the other hand, when the effect button 18A vibrates only at “low speed” and the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A or the image of the effect button 18A is not output, the specific effect of the lowest jackpot expectation is obtained.

  In this embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, as shown in the specific effect type determination process in FIG. 38, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and Although the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A which vibrates is determined, respectively, it is not restricted to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, a combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of simulated vibration sound output of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of output of the image of the effect button 18A vibrating is set in advance. Which combination of specific effects is to be determined may be determined according to the jackpot expectation. Moreover, a combination of specific effects may be set in association with each variation effect pattern.

  When the specific effect type determination process ends, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1311-1.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a determines the special effect information of the type determined in step S1311-7 in the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, and determined in step S1311-1. Information on the type of the specific effect, and the variable effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the variation effect data corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variation effect in the variation effect timer counter. . The variation effect timer counter is incremented by “4” in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variation effect at the present time by the variation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the change effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the change effect effect image based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command, and the sound output device outputs the change effect sound. The control which outputs from 15 is performed. In addition, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102. Control and control for outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs the operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and the illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting process by production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. . If the sub CPU 102a confirms that it is a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-3, and if it confirms that it is not a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-7.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the present mode is the present mode A, that is, whether or not the present mode flag “00H” is set in the present mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization process of step S10 in the main process of the main control board described above, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode flag “00H” in the effect mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  In step S1314-3, when determining that the sub CPU 102a is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, when determining that the mode is not the production mode A, the sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number (M) of the production mode by subtracting “1” from the counter value of the production mode remaining number counter in step S1314-4. In −5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

  In step S1314-5, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the remaining number (M) of the effect mode is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. If it is determined that it is “0”, in step S1314-6, an effect mode flag of “transfer destination effect mode” shown in FIG. 41 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of the transfer destination effect mode), and the effect mode setting is performed. The process ends.

  For example, the sub CPU 102a sets the production mode to the production mode B in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game, and M = 0 in step S1314-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S 1314-5), in step S 1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode after the effect mode B (transition destination effect mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode C set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode C is determined in step S1314-6. The production mode D is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode D set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode D is determined in step S1314-6. Production mode A is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information included in the special effect symbol designation command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 41A) stored in the sub ROM 102b, compares the confirmed result of the special symbol determination with the effect mode determination table, and determines the effect mode. decide.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, “effect mode B” is determined as shown in FIG. Thereby, after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game, the “effect mode B” is set.
Further, when the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 41, the “effect mode E” is determined. Thereby, after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, the “effect mode E” is set.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode that is associated with the effect mode. (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The number of performance mode executions is the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects (M: remaining number of effect modes) that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When “effect mode B” is determined in step S1314-7, “effect mode B” is set after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game. 30 times are stored as Ma).
In addition, when the “effect mode E” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, and the number of executions of the effect mode is possible. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 41A and the effect mode flow of FIG. 41B, effect mode A is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short game state.
Also, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot, if the number of special figure changes is 1 to 30 The production mode B is set, the production mode C is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 31 to 74 times, and the production mode D is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 75 to 84 times.
Also, if the number of special figure fluctuations after the third big hit game or after the small hit game when winning the third big hit or the small hit game is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode set as described above.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“Selif notice”, “Character notice”, “Development notice”, “Decisive effect”) among the change effect patterns shown in the change effect pattern determination tables of FIGS. 42 to 47 described above. The variation effect pattern in which the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect based on the information of (◯) and the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 60 to 61 is associated is determined, and the special effect associated with the determined variation effect pattern 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 52, FIG. 53, FIG. 55, FIG. 56, FIG. 58, and FIG. 59, the special effect types associated with the operation effective periods shown in FIGS. When the type of the specific effect is determined with reference to each specific effect type determination table, the operation valid period is set for the variable effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects (circle ratio) in FIGS. 42 to 47 and FIGS. 48, 51, 54, and 57, the sub CPU 102 a has the “effect mode in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. “A” is executed in “effect mode B” to “effect mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state at a rate higher than the rate of determining the special effect type associated with the operation effective period to be executed in “A”. The type of special effect associated with the operation valid period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than the ratio of the operation effective period in the variation effect of the “effect mode A” in the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, and the “effect mode in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state. In the variation effect of “B” to “effect mode D”, the operation valid period is set.

  Then, as can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects (the ratio of ○) in FIGS. 43 to 45 and FIGS. 51, 54, and 57, the sub CPU 102 a performs the second big hit game after the end of the first big hit game. Among “Production Mode B” to “Production Mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the end of “Production Mode B”, “Production Mode C” As the “effect mode D”, the special effect type associated with the operation effective period is determined as a special effect type to be executed in that mode at a higher rate. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuating effect. Here, among “production mode B” to “production mode D”, the special production executed in that mode at a higher rate as “production mode B”, “production mode C”, and “production mode D”. As the type, the type of special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), an operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) during the fluctuating effect is set.

(Production input control processing by production control board)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A, and an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated by determining whether or not any of the above has been input.

  In this step S1401, if the sub CPU 102a determines that any of the operating means has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if it is determined that no operating means has been operated, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is currently being performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1403 to change the special symbol variation. When it is determined that the display is not in progress, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation effect pattern of the variation effect being executed according to the current special symbol variation display stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the variation effect by the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403. If it is determined that it is during the operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S1405. If it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a refers to FIGS. 49, 50, 52, 53, 55, 56, 58, and 59 during the operation effective period determined in step S1404. It is confirmed whether the operating means activated during the effective period is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Then, whether or not an operation to the activated operation means has been performed depends on whether or not an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a is input. Judgment based on.

That is, when the operation means that is activated during the operation effective period is the effect button 18A, it is determined whether or not an effect button operation detection signal is input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a, and is enabled during the operation effective period. If the operating means is the effect lever 19A, it is determined whether or not an effect lever operation detection signal is input from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a.
In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the detection signal of the operating means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a in the operation effective period in step S1405, so that the operation is performed. If it is determined that a designated operation has been performed on the activated operation means, the process proceeds to step S1406, and the activated operation means detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. If it is determined that no designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been validated during the valid operation period, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets the corresponding effect control command for controlling the corresponding effect based on the designated operation to the operation means for which the operation is enabled in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a confirms “variation effect pattern A034” as the variation effect pattern in step S1403 and executes “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a sends a corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and Transmit to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display the effect image of “serif a1” as the corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” to “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation to move to “position 3” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A during the execution of a game effect related to a game using a game ball, such as a change effect performed during a special symbol change display, is performed. In the operation enabled state, the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

(Specific image priority display processing by the image control board 105)
The specific image priority display processing by the image control board 105 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S2001, the overall CPU 105Aa of the overall control unit 105A of the image control board 105 starts a timer effect while a button operation promotion image (an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A) is displayed. It is determined whether or not display of the image or the timer effect end image is started.

  In step S2001, when the overall CPU 105Aa determines that the display of the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image is started during the button operation promotion image display, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the button operation promotion image is displayed. If it is determined that the display of the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image has not started, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, the overall CPU 105Aa determines whether or not display of the button operation promotion image is started during the timer effect start image display or the timer effect end image display.

If the overall CPU 105Aa determines in step S2002 that display of the button operation promotion image is started while the timer effect start image is displayed or the timer effect end image is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2005 to display the timer effect start image display. When it is determined that the display of the button operation promotion image is not started during the middle or timer effect end image display, the process proceeds to step S2003.
In step S2003, the overall CPU 105Aa determines whether the display of the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image is started during the menu image display.

  In step S2003, when the overall CPU 105Aa determines that the display of the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image is started during the menu image display, the process proceeds to step S2006, and the timer effect start image is displayed during the menu image display. Alternatively, if it is determined that the display of the timer effect end image has not been started, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, the overall CPU 105Aa determines whether the display of the menu image is started during the timer effect start image display or the timer effect end image display.

  In step S2004, if the overall CPU 105Aa determines that the display of the menu image is started while the timer effect start image is displayed or the timer effect end image is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2006, and the timer effect start image is displayed. When it is determined that the display of the menu image is not started during the timer effect end image display, the current process is ended.

In step S2005, the general CPU 105Aa displays the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image on the display region 140 of the image display device 14 based on the layer order (see FIG. 70) stored in the general ROM 105Ab. Display with higher priority.
In step S2006, the overall CPU 105Aa prioritizes the timer effect start image or the timer effect end image over the menu image in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the layer order (see FIG. 70) stored in the control ROM 105Ab. To display.

  In FIG. 70, the order of the layers stored in the general ROM 105Ab is as follows: the first operation effect image, the second timer effect start image and the timer effect end image, the third menu image, the fourth adjustment image, and the fifth. Button operation promotion image, 6th effect design, 7th background and timer effect image (timer effect start image display period (timer effect opening effect) and timer effect end image display period (timer effect ending effect) The image is dedicated to Tono-sama time.

Here, a specific example of the variation effect will be described.
(Specific example of variation production in production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 71A shows a variation effect time in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A034”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 71 (b) is executed when the sub CPU 102 a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation rendering pattern A038”, and performs a specific rendering. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the change production to perform. FIG. 71 (c) shows a variation effect in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A042”, and executes a specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A034 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern A034” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state in the normal state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 71 (a). Production control is performed to execute the fluctuation production from timing T11 to timing T14. FIG. 72 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the change effect shown in FIG. 71A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in a period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and “normal reach A1-1” in a period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. After that, in the period (a-3) and the period (a-4) from the timing T13 to the timing T14, the effect control for executing the “super reach A1-1” is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes the special effect symbols and changes the predetermined character “character a1 (kunoichi)” in FIG. Effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-1-1) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”. “Selif notice A” is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Selif notice A” in FIG. 49A according to the execution rate of “Selif notice A” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Effect control for executing any one of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A3” in “Symbol Variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the effect button 18A or effect lever An operation valid period X11 for validating the operation 19A is set (see FIG. 49A).

  In the operation effective period X11, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A in the case of “Selif Notice A2” or “Selif Notice A3” (a-1-2) in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image shown to the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image. Further, in the case of “Serial notice A1”, an effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 72 including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. To do. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “draw the lever !!” together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

  The sub CPU 102a, as shown in the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. In the operation effective period X11 of “Serif notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state (first state)) and not in the projecting state (second state). Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

  When the sub-CPU 102a executes “Serial notice A1”, “Character a1” is changed to “Serif a1” (“One” based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is operated once during the operation effective period X11. In addition to displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 72 on the image display device 14 in a state of speaking “攫 攫 じ ゃ!”), The third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” as a movable member. A corresponding effect (notice effect) such as moving to “operation position 3” is executed. The sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the voice of “serif a1” from the voice output device 15.

  When executing the “line notice A2”, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs a press operation on the effect button 18A once during the operation effective period X11. Unlike the effect image shown in 72 (a-1-4), a response image in which “Character a1” speaks “Serif a2” (“Hundred? Production control for performing production (notice production) is performed.

  When executing the “line notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs a pressing operation on the effect button 18A once during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the effect image shown in 72 (a-1-4), a corresponding effect (displayed on the image display device 14) of an effect image in which “character a1” speaks “serif a3” (“do you have enough for both?”) ( Produce control for executing the notice effect).

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period X11 when executing the “line notice A4” and the “line notice A5”. That is, in “Serif notice A4” and “Serif notice A5”, an operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 72 is not displayed, and “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. A notice effect is displayed in which an effect image in which “a1” is speaking is displayed on the image display device 14. Note that the notice effects of “Serif notice A4” and “Serif notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in FIG. 72A-1-4 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image that states that “Serif a4” (“Do you get one car?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in FIG. 72 (a-1-4) as shown in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image of “speaking a5” (“Do you earn money?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops displaying the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. The effect control for performing the effect which displays the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) of FIG. 72 which produces the reach state to perform on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect. “Character notice A” is a notice effect that notifies the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, similarly to “Serial notice A”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in the “Change effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of “Character notice A5” is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 71 (a). The operation valid period Y11 is set (see FIG. 49B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period Y11. That is, in the operation effective period Y11, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display the effect images shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) in FIG. 72 that do not include the operation promotion notification image. Take control.

  When executing the “character notice A1”, as shown in FIG. 49B, the sub CPU 102a performs the tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period Y11, as shown in FIG. As shown in a-2-4), in the image display device 14, in addition to the already displayed “character a1”, a new character “character a2-1” is additionally displayed. Effect control for executing (notice effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A2”, as shown in FIG. 49B, the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the press of the effect button 18A once during the operation effective period Y11. The device 14 performs effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) such as additionally displaying “Character a2-2” different from “Character a2-1”.

  When executing the “character notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 49B, the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period Y11. The device 14 performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as “Character a2-1” and “Character a2-3” which are different from “Character a2-2” are additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period Y11 when executing “character notice A4” and “character notice A5”. That is, effect control for executing a notice effect in which a new character is additionally displayed is performed at a predetermined timing. The notice effects of “character notice A4” and “character notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 49B. Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  In the period (a-3) of “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and “character a3 (child A)”. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect appearing on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same two numerical values and “character a3 (A child)”. "Is performed, control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in the “super reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-1. When the specific effect is executed, the effect button 18A is changed from the state shown in FIG. 85A to the state shown in FIG. 85B in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4). The specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a envisages the development to “special reach A1-1”, which is a production with higher reliability than the “super reach A1-1” as a special effect in the “super reach A1-1”. “Development notice A” is executed. “Development notice A” is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot, like “Serial notice A” and “Character notice A”. is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation effective period X12 in which the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is valid in any of the cases of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “super reach A1-1”. Is set (see FIG. 49C).

  In the operation valid period X12, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 72 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image, or the characters “Lever retract!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image. It consists of

  However, the effect image of (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period X12, and an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the protruding button 18A in the protruding state. Contains images.

  On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12.

  When executing the “development notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 72, is based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12. In addition, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

  When executing the “development notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 49C, is based on the fact that the projecting effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X12. The second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control for executing the corresponding production (development notice) is performed.

  When executing the “development notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a performs the tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12 as shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) is performed.

  When executing the “development notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the non-projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. 49 (c). Based on this, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control is performed to execute the corresponding production (development notice).

  When executing the “development notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a performs the tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a2) is performed.

  When executing the “development notice A6”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the non-projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. 49 (c). Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

In the period (a-4) of “Super Reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. By having the same numerical value, control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in FIG. 72 (a-4) in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A022 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the variation effect pattern A034 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. ”Is executed, and effect control for executing the effect in the period (a-3) of“ super reach A1-1 ”from the timing T13 is performed.

  However, in the variation effect “variation effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops in the period (a-4) without changing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol. The effect control which displays the effect image of (A-1) of FIG. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A038 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern A038” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state in the normal state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 71 (b). Production control is performed to execute the fluctuation production from timing T21 to timing T24.

  FIG. 73 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (b), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a first decorative member 17A, and a second decorative member 17B.

  The sub CPU 102 executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern A038”, and the period from the timing T22 to the timing T23 (b -2), “normal reach A1-1” is executed, and then “special reach A1-1” is executed in the period (b-3) and the period (b-4) from timing T23 to timing T24. The production control is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image (a-1-1) in the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1), The effect image (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image a-1-2) or the effect image (b-1-3) corresponding to the effect image (a-1-3) is displayed. .

  The effect image of (b-1-2) in FIG. 73 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Serif notice A2”. When the sub-CPU 102a executes “line notice A2”, the “character a1” is changed to “line a2” (“ Performing the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) in FIG. 62 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. 72 in “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2). After that, the effect image (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image (a-2-2) or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image (a-2-3) is displayed. To do.

  The effect image shown in (b-2-4) of FIG. 73 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Character notice A2”. When executing the “character notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-2” based on a single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y21 (b). -2-4) The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the “character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs effect control to display an effect image ((b-3-1) of FIG. 73) of reach effect that tries to catch" character c1 (thief) ".

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-1. When the specific effect is executed, the effect button 18A is changed from the state shown in FIG. 85A to the state shown in FIG. 85B in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  When executing “determined effect A1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X22 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A is enabled, as shown in FIG. 71 (b). (See FIG. 49 (d)).

  In the operation effective period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image shown in (b-3-3) including an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 73 on the image display device 14. The effect to be executed is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-3), this operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Draw!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

When executing the “determination effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X22, as shown in FIG. 73 (b-3-4). In addition, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” through the “operating position 1-1”, and “moving position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  On the other hand, when executing the “decision effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid as shown in FIG. 71 (b) (see FIG. 49 (d)). .

  In the operation effective period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-2) including the operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 73 on the image display device 14. The effect to be executed is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), this operation promotion notification image is made up of the characters “Press and hold!” Together with the effect button 18A in the protruding state and the image of the timer gauge.

  Note that the image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may not indicate the state of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period. For example, the image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may indicate a non-protruding state (first state) when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period. When the effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate the protruding state (second state).

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (b-4) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. The same numerical value is used to stop the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and (b-4) in FIG. 73 shows that “character b1” catches “character c1”. The effect control which displays the effect image to show on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A026 (losing))
In the normal state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and the “variable effect pattern A026” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. The variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A038” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from timing T21 to timing T22, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (b-2) from timing T22 to timing T23. ”Is performed, and the effect control for executing the effect during the period (b-3) of“ Special Reach A1-1 ”from the timing T23 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A026” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A026”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A in any case of executing “determination effect A1” and “determination effect A2” of “special reach A1-1”. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effects symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbols and the right symbols, and the state in which “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. By displaying the effect image 73 (B-1), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A042 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern A042” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state in the normal state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 71 (c). Production control is performed to execute the fluctuation production from timing T31 to timing T35. FIG. 74 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (c), the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102 executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern A042”, and the period (c from the timing T32 to the timing T33). -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, and then "super reach A1-1" is executed in the period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and the period from timing T34 to timing T35 In (c-4) and period (c-5), effect control is performed so that “special reach A1-1” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), the sub CPU 102a corresponds to the effect image of (a-1-1) in FIG. 72 (c-1-1) in FIG. The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Selif notice A” in FIG. 49A according to the execution rate of “Selif notice A” in “Variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A3” in “Symbol Variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the effect button 18A or effect lever An operation valid period X31 for validating the operation 19A is set (see FIG. 49A).

  In the operation effective period X31, the sub CPU 102a executes the effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) in FIG. 74 including the operation promotion notification image. To do.

  The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 74 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Serial notice A3”. When the sub-CPU 102a executes the “line notice A3”, the “character a1” is changed to “line a3” (“ A corresponding effect (notice effect) is displayed in which the effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG.

  In “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first produces the effect image (c-2-1) in FIG. 74 corresponding to the effect image in (a-2-1) in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in the “Change effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “character notice A5” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 71 (c). The operation valid period Y31 is set (see FIG. 49B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period Y31. That is, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) in FIG. 74 that does not include the operation promotion notification image on the image display device 14 during the operation effective period Y31. Perform the production.

  The effect image shown in (c-2-4) of FIG. 74 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A3”. When executing the “character notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-3” based on a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y31 ( The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development advance notice A” that encourages development to “special reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation effective period X32 in which the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is valid when any of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is executed. Is set (see FIG. 49C).

  In the operation effective period X32, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 74, displays an operation promotion notification image (c-3-2) for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect which displays the effect image containing (c-3-3) on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the image of the timer gauge. In addition, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters “draw the lever !!” together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

  (C-3-4) in FIG. 74 shows an example of “development notice A1”. When executing the “development notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (c-3-4) of FIG. 74, is based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X32. In addition, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

  During the “special reach A1-1” period (c-4), the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display “Character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs the effect control for displaying the effect image ((c-4-1) of FIG. 74) of the reach effect that tries to catch" Character c1 (Thief) ".

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  In the case of executing “determined effect A” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X33 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled as shown in FIG. 71 (c). (See FIG. 49 (d)).

  In the operation effective period X33, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 74, includes the effect image shown in (c-4-2) including the operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or the operation of the effect lever 19A. Effect control for executing an effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to perform the operation is performed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “cush-down!” Together with the projected button 18A and timer gauge image (c-4-2), or the image of the effect lever 19A and timer gauge. It is made up of the characters “Draw!” (C-4-2).

When executing the “determination effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (c-4-4) of FIG. 74, is based on the fact that the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X33. In addition, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” through the “operating position 1-1”, and “moving position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  Further, when executing the “decision effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a performs the pressing operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X33, based on (c-4-4) in FIG. As shown, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” through “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1-” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. The image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. 74 (c-5) in FIG. 74 showing that “Character b1” catches “Character c1” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state aligned with the same numerical value. The effect control which displays the effect image to show on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern A030 (losing))
In the normal state, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A030” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. The variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A042” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from timing T31 to timing T32, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (c-2) from timing T32 to timing T33. ”,“ Super Reach A1-1 ”from timing T33 to timing T34, and production control for executing the production of the period (c-4) of“ special reach A1-1 ”from timing T34. I do.

The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.
However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decoration member 17A from “standby position 1” in any case of executing “decision effect A1” or “decision effect A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without the middle symbol of the three special effects symbols having the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the state where “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. Production control is performed to display 74 (C-1) production images. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern A042 (first jackpot) at the time of timer effect)
With regard to the variable effect at the time of the timer effect, the case where the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “the variable effect pattern A042” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state at the time of the timer effect is taken as an example. explain.

  The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T31 to timing T35 shown in FIG. FIG. 75 shows an effect image, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C that are displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 71 (c). Note that, as described above, during the timer effect, the changing effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A is not performed.

  The sub CPU 102 executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern A042”, and the period (c from the timing T32 to the timing T33). -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, and then "super reach A1-1" is executed in the period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and the period from timing T34 to timing T35 In (c-4) and period (c-5), effect control is performed so that “special reach A1-1” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), the sub CPU 102a first executes an effect of displaying the effect image of (c-1-1) of FIG. 75 on the image display device 14. To do. This (c-1-1) is the opening effect of the timer effect displayed in the first variation effect after the timer effect flag is turned ON. "Time entry! Big hit with Tono-sama!" Is displayed. Next, in (c-1-2) of FIG. 75, a “back view character” (timer effect character) is displayed together with a background image dedicated to the timer effect, and a plurality of special effect symbols fluctuate. "Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The character “Tono-sama time” is continuously displayed during the timer production in order to notify the player that the timer production is being performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A1” as a special effect in the “symbol change A1-1”, but as described above, during the timer effect, “line notice A1”, “line notice A2”, and “line notice A3”. “Serial notice A4” and “Serial notice A5” are different from normal times, and in this embodiment, no special effects are performed.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a stops displaying the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. The effect control for performing the effect which displays the effect image of the reach effect of (c-2-1) of FIG. 75 which generates the reach state to perform on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in the “Change effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “character notice A5” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A3” as a special effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the operation is effective to activate the effect lever 19A. A period Y31 is set (see FIG. 49B).

  In the operation valid period Y31, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image shown in (c-2-2) of FIG. 75 including an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the case of “character notice A1”. An effect to be displayed on the display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “draw the lever !!” together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

  When executing the “character notice A1”, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the sub CPU 102a performs a tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period Y31, as shown in FIG. As shown in c-2-4), the image display device 14 displays an effect image in which “the character in the back” is “Tono-sama”, or as shown in (c-2-5) in FIG. In the image display device 14, an effect image in which “the character in the back” is “侍” is displayed. In this corresponding effect, in the case of a big hit, an effect image of “Tono-sama” is displayed at a rate of 90%, and an effect image of “侍” is displayed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the effect image of “侍” is displayed at a rate of 100%.

  The sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period Y31 when executing “character notice A2”, “character notice A3”, “character notice A4”, and “character notice A5”. In other words, an effect in which “Tono-sama” and “侍” are displayed is not performed.

  In the period (c-3) of “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value, and the reach effect in which “small castle” appears. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and “small castle” appears. Control for displaying the effect image shown in (c-3-1) of FIG. 75 on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development advance notice A” that encourages development to “special reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X32 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A is valid when executing “Development Notice A1”, “Development Notice A3”, and “Development Notice A5” in “Super Reach A1-1”. (See FIG. 50 (c)).

  In the operation effective period X32, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image including an operation promotion notification image (c-3-2) prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. Execute. The image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters “draw the lever!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image. When the operation valid period X32 is not set (when “development notice A2”, “development notice A4”, and “development notice A6” are executed), as shown in (c-3-3) of FIG. 75, “small castle” Will remain reach reach.

  (C-3-4) in FIG. 75 illustrates an example of “development notice A1”. As shown in (c-3-4) of FIG. 75, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A1” based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X32. In addition, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

  In the period (c-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the “large castle” together with the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. The effect control for displaying the effect image ((c-4-1) in FIG. 75) of the reach effect in which appears.

  When executing “determined effect A1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X33 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A is enabled as shown in FIG. 71 (c). (See FIG. 50D). On the other hand, when the “decided effect” is not performed or when the “decided effect A2” is executed, the operation valid period for validating the operation of the effect lever 19A is not set.

  In the operation valid period X33, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image shown in (c-4-2) including an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. Production control for performing the production to be performed is performed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Draw!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image (c-4-2).

When executing the “determination effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilting operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X33, as shown in FIG. 75 (c-4-4). In addition, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” through the “operating position 1-1”, and “moving position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  Further, when executing the “decision effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member to the “standby position 1” as shown in (c-4-4) of FIG. ”To“ operation position 1-2 ”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via“ operation position 1-1 ”, and a flash effect image ( Effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying the flash light a2) is performed.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. With the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and the effect image shown in (c-5) of FIG. Production control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Change effect related to change effect pattern A030 (lost) during timer effect)
At the time of the timer performance, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variable performance pattern A030” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically executes FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A042” shown in c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from timing T31 to timing T32, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (c-2) from timing T32 to timing T33. ”,“ Super Reach A1-1 ”from timing T33 to timing T34, and production control for executing the production of the period (c-4) of“ special reach A1-1 ”from timing T34. I do.

The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.
However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a always makes the corresponding effect of “character notice A1” an effect in which “character in the back” is “侍” (FIG. 75 (c-2-). 5)). Further, in the case of executing either “decision effect A1” or “decision effect A2”, the first decorative member 17A is not moved from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without changing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and FIG. Effect control for displaying the effect image of 1) is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

As described above, the effect of changing the effect mode A at the time of the timer effect is not performed by causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Only the effect that causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation can be executed. That is, the variation effect in the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect is not performed with the variation effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A, and only the variation effect accompanied with the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed.
In the following description using FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is referred to as a button operation promotion image.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern A026 (lost) when the start condition of the timer effect opening effect is satisfied during the button operation promotion image display)
With regard to the variation effect when the start condition of the timer effect opening effect is satisfied during the button operation promotion image display, the determination result of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state is “lost” and “variation effect pattern A026” The case where is selected will be described as an example.

  The sub CPU 102a does not set the operation effective period for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A (operation means) in the first period that is the first period of the “symbol variation A2-1”, and (c1 in FIG. 76). As shown in (1-1), in the state where the effect button 18A is not lit, the image display device 14 performs effect control so that the change effect starts from the normal change effect pattern. Although not shown, in the middle of the first period, the timer effect flag is turned ON and the timer effect start time is reached, and the sub CPU 102a starts the timer effect notice for 10 seconds described above, and the display area of the image display device 14 is displayed. At 140, for example, “10 seconds until the start of Tonosama time” is displayed, and the number of seconds is counted down.

  Next, in the second period following the first period, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 18A in order to perform an effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A of the “variable effect pattern A026”. As shown in (c1-1-2) of FIG. 76, the button operation promotion image (first operation promotion display) is displayed on the image display device 14 and the effect button light emitting diode 18c is caused to emit light. Thus, the effect control for causing the effect button 18A to emit light (second operation promotion display) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the timer effect notice is finished and the opening effect start time of the timer effect is reached, the sub CPU 102a displays the timer effect start image (specific effect display on the image control board 105 in the third period following the second period. ) Is sent to display the command. As a result, the specific image priority display process of the general CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105 becomes a flow of steps S2001 to S2005, and the general CPU 105Aa gives priority to the timer effect start image of the specific image over the button operation promotion image in the image display device 14. (So that the visual recognition of the button operation promotion image is regulated by the timer effect start image). As a result, as shown in (c1-1-3) of FIG. 76, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa display the timer effect start image so as to overlap the front side of the button operation promotion image and display a predetermined effect. Perform production control to output sound. The button operation promotion image is completely hidden by the timer effect start image, but a part of the button operation promotion image may be visible.

  Here, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for causing the image display device 14 to display an operation effect image (operation corresponding display). Thereby, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa, in the fourth period following the third period, as shown in (c1-1-4) of FIG. ) With priority over the timer effect start image, the operation effect image is displayed on the front side of the timer effect start image, and the effect control is performed to output a predetermined effect sound. In addition, effect control for terminating the light emission of the effect button light emitting diode 18c is performed. When the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, the display of the timer effect start image (specific effect display) may be ended. In addition, the timer effect start image is displayed with priority over the operation effect image (operation corresponding display) (so that the button effect promoting image is restricted by the timer effect start image). You may make it overlap and display on the front side rather than an image. In that case, a part of the operation effect image may be hidden while being visible, or the entire operation effect image may be hidden.

  When the opening effect of the timer effect ends after the fourth period, the sub CPU 102a shifts to the “Tonosama time” effect control by the variable effect pattern determination table dedicated to the timer effect, and changes the effect of “Tonosama time”. The process is executed up to the fluctuating effect that becomes the timer effect end time.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern A026 (losing) when button operation promotion image display is started during opening effect of timer effect)
For the variation effect when the button operation promotion image display is started during the opening effect of the timer effect, the determination result of the big hit is “lost” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and “variation effect pattern A026” is selected. This will be described as an example.

  The sub CPU 102a does not set the operation effective period for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A (operation means) in the first period that is the first period of the “symbol variation A3-1”, and (c2 in FIG. 77). As shown in (1-1), in the state where the effect button 18A is not lit, the image display device 14 performs effect control so that the change effect starts from the normal change effect pattern. Although not shown, in the middle of the first period, the timer effect start time is reached earlier than in the case of FIG. 76, and the sub CPU 102a starts the timer effect notice for 10 seconds, and the display area 140 of the image display device 14 is displayed. For example, “10 seconds until the Tono-sama time starts” is displayed, and the number of seconds is counted down.

  Thereafter, when the timer effect notice end time is reached, the sub CPU 102a does not cause the effect button 18A to emit light in the second period following the first period, as shown in (c2-1-2) of FIG. Then, a transition is made to the opening effect period of the timer effect, and effect control for displaying the timer effect start image on the image display device 14 is performed.

  Thereafter, in the third period following the second period, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 18A in order to perform an effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A of the “variable effect pattern A026”. The period is set, and as shown in (c2-1-3) of FIG. 77, effect control for causing the effect button 18A to emit light is performed. Further, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for displaying the button operation promotion image on the image control board 105, thereby displaying the button operation promotion image on the image display device 14 and performing control for outputting a predetermined effect sound. However, the specific image priority display process of the general CPU 105Aa is a flow of steps S2001 → S2002 → S2005, and the general CPU 105Aa displays the timer effect start image in the image display device 14 as shown in (c2-1-3) of FIG. (Specific effect display) is displayed with priority over the button operation promotion image (so that the button operation promotion image is visually recognized by the timer effect start image). As a result, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa perform effect control for displaying the timer effect start image so as to overlap the front side of the button operation promotion image in the third period. The button operation promotion image is completely hidden by the timer effect start image, but a part of the button operation promotion image may be visible.

  Here, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for causing the image display device 14 to display an operation effect image (operation corresponding display). Thereby, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa, in the fourth period following the third period, as shown in (c2-1-4) of FIG. 77, the operation effect image (operation corresponding display) by the cut-in of the character. ) Is displayed with priority over the timer effect start image, effect control is performed so that the operation effect image is displayed on the front side more than the timer effect start image. In addition, effect control for terminating the light emission of the effect button light emitting diode 18c is performed. When the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, the display of the timer effect start image (specific effect display) may be ended. In addition, the timer effect start image is displayed with priority over the operation effect image (operation corresponding display) (so that the button effect promoting image is restricted by the timer effect start image). You may make it overlap and display on the front side rather than an image.

  When the opening effect of the timer effect ends after the fourth period, the sub CPU 102a shifts to the “Tonosama time” effect control by the variable effect pattern determination table dedicated to the timer effect, and changes the effect of “Tonosama time”. The process is executed up to the fluctuating effect that becomes the timer effect end time.

  Although not shown, in this embodiment, as in the case of the opening effect of the timer effect, the sub CPU 102a and the general CPU 105Aa display the timer effect end image as compared to the button operation promotion image even during the timer effect ending effect. Production control is performed to overlap the front side display.

(Specific example of fluctuation production in production mode B in normal time)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to the thirty times of the variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state in the normal time (not in the time of the timer effect) will be described. To do.
FIG. 78 (a) shows the temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 78 (b) shows the temporal effect of the variation effect that is executed when the sub CPU 102 a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 78 (c) shows the time of variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B019 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern B019” is selected in the first to thirty times of the fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state in the normal time, the sub CPU 102a The effect control for executing the fluctuating effect from the timing T401 to the timing T403 shown in 78 (a) is performed.

  FIG. 79 shows an effect image, an effect button 18A, and an effect lever 19A that are displayed on the image display device 14 in the changing effect shown in FIG. 78 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. In the period (d-4), effect control for executing “Special Character Reach B1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of the “symbol change B3-1”.

  In the period (d-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (d-1) of FIG. 79 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. To control.

  Then, during the period (d-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. Display of the effect images (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Production control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development notice B” that envisages development to “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice B1”, “development notice B1”, “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variation effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development Notice B2”.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the “symbol change B3-1” in any case of executing “development notice B1” and “development notice B2”. The operation valid period X41 is set. In the operation valid period X41, the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) previously stopped and the reach state is generated, such as whether or not a reach state occurs. Set during execution.

  In the operation effective period X41, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation for prompting the operation of the effect image (d-2-1) or the effect lever 19A including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image (d-2-2) containing the image of a promotion alerting | reporting on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (d-2-1) and “Deletion Notice B2”. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters (d-2-2) including the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge and the characters “draw the lever!”.

  The effect image (d-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period X41 of the “development notice B2”, and the operation to the protruding effect button 18A is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting is included.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice B1”, the special effect design of the reach-rolling effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X41. An effect for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 79) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 14 Take control.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice B2”, the effect image (overlaid on the special effect design of reach reach effect is superimposed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X41. Effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 79) having an effect b2 (orange) on the image display device 14.

  (D-2-3) of FIG. 79 shows an example of “development notice B1”. When executing the “development notice B1”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X41, based on (d-2 in FIG. 79). As shown in -3), a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of reach reach effect.

  Further, in the “development notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a has a reach different from (d-2-3) of FIG. 79 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X41. Effect control is performed to execute an advance notice (corresponding effect), such as displaying an effect image (effect b2) superimposed on a special effect symbol of a roaring effect.

  In the period (d-3) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the special character “Character s1 (warrior)”. "D" (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in FIG. 79 showing the content of fighting the special character "Character p1 (enemy warrior)" on the image display device 14. Perform production control to be displayed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

Then, during the period (d-4) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (the middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (D-4) of FIG. 79 showing that “Character s1” defeats “Character p1” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. The effect control to display the effect image shown in FIG.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern B013” is selected in the first to thirty times of fluctuation in the normal high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically Performs a variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. ) And period (d-4), “special character reach B1-1” is executed. Moreover, when performing a specific effect, a specific effect is performed during execution of "special character reach B1-1."

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B019”, the sub CPU 102a does not have the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols in “special character reach B1-1”. Effect control is performed to display an effect image (D-1) in a state where “Character s1” is overthrown by “Character p1”. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B021 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern B021” is selected at the first to thirty times of the fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short hour gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs effect control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T501 to timing T503 shown in FIG. 78 (b).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern B021”. In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) up to the timing T503, effect control for executing “special character reach B2-1” is performed.

  In the period (e-1) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images that change a plurality of special effect symbols.

  In the period (e-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. 80 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. The production control is performed.

  Then, during the period (e-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images of (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Production control for display on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute “development notice B” that envisages development to “special character reach B2-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B1”, “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in the “variation effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed so as to execute any one of “evolution notice B2”.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the “symbol change B3-1” in any case of executing “development notice B1” and “development notice B2”. An operation valid period X51 is set. In the operation effective period X51, the special effect design (the right design) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special production design (the left design) that has been stopped first, and the reach state is generated. Set during execution.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation prompting the operation of the effect image (e-2-1) or the effect lever 19A including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image of the effect image (e-2-2) containing the image of a promotion alerting | reporting on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (e-2-1). The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “Erase lever!” (E-2-2) together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  However, the effect image of (e-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state during the operation effective period X51 of the “development notice B1”, and the operation to the protruding effect button 18A is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting is included.

  (E-2-3) in FIG. 80 shows an example of “development notice B1”. When executing “development notice B1”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X51 based on (e-2 in FIG. 80). As shown in 3), control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on a special effect design of reach reach effect.

  Further, in the “development notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (e-2-3) of FIG. 80, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X51. Then, control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 14 over the special effect design of the reach effect.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special performance symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (e-3) of the “special character reach B2-1” and the special character “character s2 (warrior)”. 80 performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 80 of the content that “” fights the special character “Character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B2-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a performs control so that “decision effect B” is executed in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a controls to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed to execute one of the “decision effects B2”.

  (E-3-2) of FIG. 80 shows an example of “decision effect B1”. When executing the “decision effect B1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X52 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means is valid in the “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation effective period X52, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-2) in FIG. 80) including an image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the projecting effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a, as shown in (e-3-3) of FIG. 80, is based on the fact that the press button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X52 in the “determination effect B1”. In addition, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “decision effect” (corresponding effect) is executed, such as moving to the lower position “operation position 1-2”.

  (E-3-3) in FIG. 80 shows an example of “decision effect B2”. When the “determination effect B2” is executed, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X52 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A as the operation means is valid in the “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation effective period X52, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-3) in FIG. 80) including an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 based on the fact that the tilt operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X52 in the “determination effect B2”. The first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. The content “decision effect” (corresponding effect) is executed.

In the period (e-4) of “special character reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is being changed is stopped and displayed first. As shown in (e-4) of FIG. 80, “Character s2” defeats “Character p2” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in this “decision effect B”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect B”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect B” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B015 (losing))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern B015” is selected in the 1st to 30th changes in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Basically, a variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502, and the period (e-3) from the timing T502 to the timing T503. ) And the period (e-4), the effect control is performed so that “special character reach B2-1” is executed. Further, when executing a specific effect, the specific effect is executed during the execution of “special character reach B2-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute one of the “decision effects B2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols having the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s2” is defeated by “Character p2”. Effect control for displaying the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. 80 is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B023 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” and “fluctuation effect pattern B023” is selected at the first to the 30th fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state in the normal time, the sub CPU 102a Performs control to execute a fluctuating effect from timing T601 to timing T603 shown in FIG. 78 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern B023”, and from the timing T602. In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) up to the timing T603, presentation control is performed so that “special character reach B3-1” is executed.

  In the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B023”, the effect contents of “symbol variation B3-1” in period (f-1) and period (f-2) from timing T601 to timing T602 are “variation effect pattern B019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol fluctuation B3-1”.

  In the sub CPU 102a, the operation effective period X61 shown in FIG. 78 (c) corresponds to the operation effective period X41 shown in FIG. 78 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (f-3) of the “special character reach B3-1” and the special character “character s3 (warrior)”. "(Not shown) performs effect control so that an effect image of content fighting the special character" Character p3 (enemy warrior) "(not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X62 as shown in FIG. 78 (c) in the “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2”. Also, the specific effect execution period W61 shown in FIG. 78 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W41 shown in FIG. 78 (a).

In the period (f-4) of “special character reach B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. As a result, the image display device 14 displays an effect image informing that “Character s3” has defeated “Character p3” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value. Control to display on the screen.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern B017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern B017” is selected in the first to thirty times of the fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state in the normal time, the sub CPU 102a Specifically, the effect control is performed so as to execute the variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B023”. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602, and the period (f-3) from the timing T602 to the timing T603. ) And effect control to execute “Special Character Reach B3-1” in the period (f-4). When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W61 is set and the specific effect is executed when the “special character reach B3-1” is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W61, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B3-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols to be the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s3” is defeated by “Character p3”. By displaying the effect image (not shown), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Explanation of variation effect of effect mode B at the time of timer effect)
Next, the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to the thirty times of the variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state at the time of the timer effect will be described. At the time of the timer effect, even in the effect mode B, the effect dedicated to the timer effect is performed without performing the effect only for the effect mode B as shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the “Tono-sama time” effect as illustrated in FIG. 75 is performed. Therefore, when the timer effect flag is ON and the timer effect is in effect, even in the effect mode B, as in the effect mode A, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. The effect of displaying the effect image including the image on the image display device 14 is not executed, and only the effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. ing. That is, the variation effect in the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect is not performed with the variation effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A, and only the variation effect accompanied with the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed.

(Specific example of fluctuating effects in effect mode C during normal times)
Next, referring to FIG. 81, the variation effect pattern variation effect in the effect mode C set in the 31st to 74th variations in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state in the normal time (not in the timer effect time) An example will be described.
FIG. 81 (a) shows a temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 81 (b) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. Further, FIG. 81 (c) shows the temporal variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern C019 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern C019” is selected at the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T701 to timing T703 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 82 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 81A, an effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and the period (g-3) from the timing T702 to the timing T703. In the period (g-4), “attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (g-1) of the “symbol change C3-1”.

  In the period (g-1) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (g-1) of FIG. 82 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. Execute.

  Then, during the period (g-2) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images of (g-2-1), (g-2-2), and (g-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Control to display on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice C” as a special effect, encouraging the development to “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice C1”, “development notice C1”, “development notice C” according to the execution ratio of “development notice C” in the “variation effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of “Development notice C2” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the operation effective period X71 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the “symbol change C3-1” regardless of whether the “development notice C1” or the “development notice C2” is executed. Set. In the operation effective period X71, a special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped first, and a reach state effect such as whether or not a reach state occurs. Set during execution.

  In the operation valid period X71, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 82, provides an effect image (g-2-1) including an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect which displays the effect image of the effect image (g-2-2) containing the image of a promotion alerting | reporting on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The operation advance notification image of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (g-2-1) with the letters “Press the button!”, And “Development Notice B2” The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “give the lever!” (G-2-2) together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice C1”, the special effect design of the reach roll effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X71. A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 82) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “development notice C2”, the sub CPU 102a superimposes the effect image (with the special effect design of reach reach production on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X71 on the effect lever (A). A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 82) having an effect c2 (red) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the period (g-3) of “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the character “character b1 (１)” is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG. 82 on the image display device 14 such as sprinting and attacking the enemy. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 when the “attack reach C1-1” is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W71, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85 (a) to the state of FIG. 85 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  (G-3-2) and (g-3-4) in FIG. 82 show examples of “decision effect C1”. When executing the “decision effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means is valid in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (notification promotion image made up of the characters “Press and hold!” Together with the projection button 18A in the protruding state and the timer gauge image) that prompts the player to operate the performance button 18A is executed.

  In the “determination effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X72. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operating position 1-1” as a movable member, and the “motion position 1-2” is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with the content of moving to “” is executed.

  (G-3-3) in FIG. 82 shows an example of “decision effect C2”. When the “decision effect C2” is executed, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A as the operation means is valid in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (notification promotion image made up of characters “Draw!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image) is executed to urge the player to operate the effect lever 19A.

  In the “decision effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect image (not shown) of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X72. ) And the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with a content such as “-2” is executed.

  In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “decision effect C”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect C”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect C” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

Then, in the period (g-4) of the “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (G-4) in FIG. 72 which notifies that “Character b1” “destroyed” the enemy while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern C013 (losing))
In the normal time, when the big hit determination result is “lost” and “variable effect pattern C013” is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short hour gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Basically, a variation effect similar to the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and in the period (g-3) from the timing T702, “ The attack reach C1-1 "is executed. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 when the “attack reach C1-1” is being executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character b1” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image (G-1), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern C021 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern C021” is selected at the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs the changing effect from timing T801 to timing T803 shown in FIG. 81 (b).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h−1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern C021”, and from the timing T802. In the period (h-3) and period (h-4) up to timing T803, “attack reach C2-1” is executed.

  In the variation production of the “variation production pattern C021”, the production contents of the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 are “variation production pattern C019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol variation C3-1”. The operation effective period X81 shown in FIG. 81 (b) corresponds to the operation effective period X71 shown in FIG. 81 (a).

  During the “attack reach C2-1” period (h-3), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value, and the “character q2 (samurai)” is running. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack. The specific effect execution period W81 shown in FIG. 81 (b) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 81 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect during the period (h-3) of “attack reach C2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X82 as shown in FIG. 81 (b) in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”.

Then, during the period (h-4) of “attack reach C2-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q2” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to the normal variation effect pattern C015 (losing))
In the normal time, and in the high probability game state and the short high game state, when the jackpot determination result is “losing” and the “variable effect pattern C015” is selected in the 31st to 74th changes, the sub CPU 102a Basically, a variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C021” shown in FIG. 71 (b) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h−1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and in the period (h-3) from the timing T802, “ Execute “Attack Reach C2-1”. When executing a specific effect, the specific effect execution period W81 is set and the specific effect is executed when “attack reach C2-1” is being executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of which of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and also notifies that “Character q2” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern C023 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern C023” is selected in the variation 31 to 74th in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs the variation effect from timing T901 to timing T903 shown in FIG. 81 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i−1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern C023”, and from the timing T902. “Attack reach C3-1” is executed in the period (i-3) and the period (i-4) until the timing T903.

In the variation production of “variation production pattern C023”, the production contents of “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from timing T901 to timing T902 are “variation production pattern C019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol variation C3-1”.
That is, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) in FIG. 81 (c) in the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2). Is displayed.
The operation effective period X91 shown in FIG. 81 (c) corresponds to the operation effective period X71 shown in FIG. 81 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the “attack reach C3-1” period (i-3), and “Character q3 (Ronin)” sprints. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack. The specific effect execution period W91 shown in FIG. 81 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 81 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.
When executing the “decision effect C1” in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C023”, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period X92 as shown in FIG. 81 (c).

Then, during the period (i-4) of “attack reach C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q3” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.
(Variation effect related to the normal variation effect pattern C017 (losing))
In the normal time, when the jackpot determination result is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern C017” is selected in the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Basically, a variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C023” shown in FIG. 81 (c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i−1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902, and the “CPU in the period (i-3) from the timing T902” “Attack Reach C3-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decoration member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or the “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C3-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character q3” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Explanation of variation effect in effect mode C at the time of timer effect)
Next, the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C set at the time of the variation 31 to 74th in the high probability game state and the short-time game state at the time of the timer effect will be described. At the time of the timer effect, even in the effect mode C, the effect dedicated to the timer effect is performed without performing the effect dedicated to the effect mode C as shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the “Tono-sama time” effect as illustrated in FIG. 75 is performed. Therefore, when the timer effect flag is ON and the timer effect is in effect, even in the effect mode B, as in the effect mode A, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. The effect of displaying the effect image including the image on the image display device 14 is not executed, and only the effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. ing. That is, the variation effect in the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect is not performed with the variation effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A, and only the variation effect accompanied with the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed.

(Specific example of fluctuating production in normal production mode D)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state in the normal time (not in the timer effect) will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control so as to execute a change effect having a janken effect with the content that two characters perform “Janken” as the change effect.

  FIG. 83A is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D019”. FIG. 83B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D022”. FIG. 83C is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D25”.

(Variation effect related to the normal variation effect pattern D019 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D019” is selected in the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T1001 to timing T1003 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 84 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the changing effect shown in FIG. 83A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, and a first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a displays “symbol variation D1-1” in a period (j−1) to a period (j-3) from timing T1001 to timing T1002, and a period (j−4) from timing T1002 to timing T1003. Production control is performed so that “Janken Reach D1-1 (Win)” is executed in the period (j-5).

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. 84 in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed in the period (j-1) of the “symbol fluctuation D1-1”, and the period (j-2). Then, the effect control is performed so that the effect image of (j-2) in FIG. 84 in which the character display “Janken wins twice !!” is superimposed on the display image of the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D1-1” period (j-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. 84. (j-3-3) in FIG. 84 shows that the character “Friendly r1” who is an ally character and “Character u1” who is an opponent character perform the first round of junken together with the reach of whether or not to perform. 1) or (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) effect images are displayed on the image display device 14 for effect control.

  As shown in the effect images of (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) in FIG. 84, the sub CPU 102a displays “Janken Reach D1- Execute “Development Notice D” encouraging the development to “1 (win)”. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as the operation means during the period (j-3), regardless of whether the advance notice D1 or the advance notice D2 is executed as the special effect. A valid operation valid period X101 is set.

  In the operation effective period X101, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. In the operation effective period X101, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) as shown in (j-3-1) of FIG. The operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate 18A is controlled to be executed. If it is “Development notice D2,” the operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the effect lever 19A as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Control to execute.

  When executing the “development notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) in the operation valid period X101, and also shows (j-3-1) in FIG. As described above, from the image of the projecting effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and the characters "Press!" Together with the effect image of "Character r1" and "Character u1" being "Janken" in the introduction part of Jeanken. The effect which displays the effect image of the operation promotion notification which urges operation of the effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14 is executed.

On the other hand, when executing the “development notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a displays “character r1” and “character u1” in the operation valid period X101 as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. In addition to the effect image of the appearance of “Janken” in the introduction part of Janken, the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge and the effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A consisting of the letters “Close!” The effect displayed on the display device 14 is executed.
Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice D1”, the special effect design of reach reach effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X101. In addition, the effect image (effect d1 (blue)) is superimposed on the effect image with the content that “character r1” wins “character u1” in the first round of Janken ((j-3-3 in FIG. 78). )) Is displayed on the image display device 14 and a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

  When executing the “development notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect design of reach-reaching production and the first round of Janken based on the tilting operation performed on the production lever 19A during the operation effective period X101. In FIG. 84, the effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 84) having the effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) is superimposed on the effect image having the content that “character r1” wins “character u1”. The corresponding effect (development notice) is displayed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W101 in the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1” and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W101, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 102a performs two identical operations in “Janken reach D1-1 (win)” in the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1”. When numerical special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation to validate the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4), regardless of which of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is executed as the special effect. An effective period Y101 is set. In the operation valid period X101, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-1) and (j-4-2) of FIG. 84, prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Do not execute.

  In the “character notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 84, based on the single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying “Character d1” as a support character of “Character r1” on the image display device 14.

  In “Character notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a selects “Character d2”, which is the support character of “Character r1”, based on the fact that the presentation button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X101. Control to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In “Character notice D3”, the sub CPU 102a displays “Character d3”, which is the support character of “Character r1”, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X101. 14 is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as that displayed on the screen 14.

  Then, after executing this “character notice D”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-4), (j-4-5), and (j-4-6) in FIG. Effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image with the content that “r1” and “character u1” perform the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” as a special effect in the effect of the second round of janken, as shown in the effect images of (j-4-4) and (j-4-5) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” as a special effect, the operation effective period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid during the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1 (win)”. X102 is set. Then, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “go”, “choki”, “par” in the operation effective period X102. In the production image of the state before any of the above, the operation promotion for prompting the operation to the projection button 18A in the projecting state, which includes the projection button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Press!” Production control is performed so as to display a notification image.

  In the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a makes a “winning” in the image display device 14 based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X102. d1 ”is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as a movable member from the“ standby position 1 ”to the“ operation position 1-1 ”, which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “decision effect” (corresponding effect) with the content of moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  Further, when the “determination effect D2” is executed as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation to validate the operation of the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4) of the “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. An effective period X102 is set. Then, as shown in (j-4-5) of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “goo”, “choki”, “par” in the operation effective period X102. In the effect image of the state before any one of the above is displayed, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A, which includes the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Close!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a performs “tilt d2” that wins the big hit in the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X102. An effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” through “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with a content such as “-2” is executed.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect D”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect D” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

After executing the “decision effect D” in the period (j-4) of the “Janken Reach D1-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs the janken 2 as shown in the effect image (j-4-7) in FIG. After displaying the effect image of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” by “Character r1” issuing “Cho” and “Character u1” issuing “Par” in the round, the period (j -5) As shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 84, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing is the same as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that were previously stopped and displayed. 84, the effect control for displaying the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 84 that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern D010 (losing))
In the normal state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern D010” is selected at the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a The variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” shown in FIG. 83A is executed. In other words, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D1-1” in the period (j−1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002, that is, the “character r1” becomes the “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)” after executing the variation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning by janken. In “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same manner as the fluctuating effect in the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 of “Janken Reach D1-1 (winning)”. And reach production including production to perform the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as a special effect in the period (j-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D019” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D010” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a executes “determination effect D1” in “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)” and then, as shown in FIG. 84 (J-1). In addition, in the second round of Janken, after “Character r1” gave “Choki” and “Character u1” gave “Goo”, an image of “Character r1” losing to “Character u1” was displayed. 84. As shown in the effect image (J-2) in FIG. 84, the special effect symbol that is changing (the middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the normal variation effect pattern D022 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D022” is selected in the fluctuation 75 to 84th in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Executes the fluctuating effect from timing T1101 to timing T1103 shown in FIG. 83 (b).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D2-1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, and the period (k−4) from the timing T1102 to the timing T1103 In the period (k-5), “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation D2-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (k-1). In the period of “symbol variation D2-1” (k-2), an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 3 wins !!” is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D2-1” period (k-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub-CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D2-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation that validates the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the period (k-3), regardless of whether the advance notice D1 or the advance notice D2 is executed as the special effect. An effective period X111 is set.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” in the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W111 for executing the specific effect in the period (k-4). Then, in the specific effect execution period W111, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 85A to the state of FIG. 85B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period Y111 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (k-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Character r1” and “Character u1” in the second and third rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “decision effect D” in the third round of the Janken game in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X112 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective in the period of performing the third round of Janken in the latter half (k-4) of the “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”. Set. In the operation effective period X112 of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a before the “character r1” and the “character u1” give out “goo”, “choki”, or “par” in the third round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is composed of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display “Press!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above. In addition, the sub-CPU 102a determines whether “character r1” and “character u1” are “goo”, “choki”, or “par” in the third round of Janken during the operation effective period X112 of “decision effect D2”. Effect control to display an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A, which includes an effect lever 19A, a timer gauge, and a character display of “Let's pull!” In the effect image before being put out. I do.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Effect D” during the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, produces an effect of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” in the third round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (k-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that have been stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern D013 (losing))
In the normal time, when the big hit determination result is “losing” and “fluctuation effect pattern D013” is selected at the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown in FIG. 83B is executed. In other words, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D2-1”, that is, “character r1” in the period (k−1) to period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102 is “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)” after executing the variation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning by janken. In “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same way as the variation effect of the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 of “Janken Reach D2-1 (winning)”. In the second round of Janken, “Character r1” wins “Character u1”, and in the third round of Janken, “Character r1” loses to “Character u1”. Perform reach production.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the specific effect in the period (k-4) in the period (k-4) in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D013” as well as the special effect. "Decision effect D" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)” and then “Character r1” is “ After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the normal variation effect pattern D025 (first jackpot))
In the normal time, when the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D025” is selected in the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a Performs the fluctuating effect from timing T1201 to timing T1203 shown in FIG. 83 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, and the period (l-4) from the timing T1202 to the timing T1203; In the period (1-5), “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect similar to the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (l-1). In the period (1-2) of “symbol variation D3-1”, an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 4 wins!” Is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is displayed as an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D3-1” period (l-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation for validating the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the period (l-3), regardless of whether the “development notice D1” or the “development notice D2” is executed as the special effect. An effective period X121 is set.

  In the “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” period “1-4” of the “Janken Reach D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W121 when executing a specific effect. The specific effect determined with reference to FIG. 67 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period Y121 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (l-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Charar1” and “Character u1” in the second through fourth rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” in the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of the period (l-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” as a special effect, in the period when the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of this “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” period (l-4) is performed. An operation valid period X122 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A is set. In the operation effective period X122 of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a before “Character r1” and “Character u1” give any of “Goo”, “Cho”, and “Par” in the fourth round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is composed of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display “Press!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a determines that “character r1” and “character u1” are “goo”, “choki”, and “par” in the fourth round of Janken during the operation valid period X122. In the effect image of the state before taking out, an image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation to the effect lever 19A, including the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display “Let's pull!” Is displayed. Perform production control.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Production D” during period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, produces an appearance that “Character r1” wins over “Character u1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (1-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to normal variation effect pattern D016 (losing))
In the normal time, when the big hit determination result is “lost” and “variable effect pattern D016” is selected at the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short high gaming state, the sub CPU 102a A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D025” is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (1-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, that is, the “character r1” becomes the “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D3-1 (Lose)” after executing a variation effect of a special effect symbol including an effect of winning by Janken. In “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same manner as the fluctuating effect in the period (1-4) from the timing T1202 of “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”. Reach production including the production to perform the second round to the fourth round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 in the period (l-4) as in the case of the “change effect pattern D025” when executing the specific effect in the change effect of the “change effect pattern D016”. The specific effect determined with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as the special effect in the period (l-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D025” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D016” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, and then “Character r1” becomes “Character r1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Explanation of variation effect of effect mode D at the time of timer effect)
Next, the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C that is set at the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state at the time of the timer effect will be described. At the time of the timer effect, even in the effect mode D, the effect dedicated to the timer effect is performed without performing the effect only for the effect mode D as shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the “Tono-sama time” effect as illustrated in FIG. 75 is performed. Therefore, when the timer effect flag is ON and the timer effect is in effect, even in the effect mode B, as in the effect mode A, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. The effect of displaying the effect image including the image on the image display device 14 is not executed, and only the effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed. ing. That is, the variation effect in the effect mode B at the time of the timer effect is not performed with the variation effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A, and only the variation effect accompanied with the operation of the effect lever 19A can be executed.

As described above, in the changing effects of the effect modes A to D at the normal time, the sub CPU 102a keeps the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state in the operation effective period for performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A. (First state) or protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the non-protruding state (first state) and the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period during which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A is not performed. The state of ().

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y executes the variation effects of the effect modes B to D in the specific game state (the high probability game state and the short time game state) after the end of the jackpot game. The operational effective period is set during the changing production at a higher rate in the changing production in the production mode C (from the 31st to the 74th fluctuation) than the fluctuation production in the first fluctuation (the first fluctuation to the 30th fluctuation). The operation effective period is set during the change effect at a higher rate in the change effect (changes 75th to 84th) of the effect mode D than the effect.

The customer waiting effect control process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
As a customer waiting effect control process, the sub CPU 102a first determines in step S3001-1 whether or not the current gaming state is in a customer waiting state, and if it is determined in a customer waiting state, step S3001 is executed. If the process is shifted to 2 and it is determined that the customer waiting state is not being established, the customer waiting effect control process is terminated.

  In step S3001-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether a detection signal is input from the effect button detection switch 18a, that is, whether an operation is performed on the effect button 18A. When the detection signal is not input from the effect button detection switch 18a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S3001-5, and when the detection signal is input from the effect button detection switch 18a, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S3001-3. Move processing.

  In step S3001-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu screen is being displayed (the menu screen shown in FIGS. 87, 88, and 90 is displayed) and determines that the menu screen is not being displayed. If the process proceeds to step S3001-4 and it is determined that the menu screen is being displayed, the customer waiting effect control process is terminated.

  In step S3001-4, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of displaying a menu screen instead of the screen waiting for the customer waiting effect, such as the customer waiting effect waiting image or the customer waiting effect image, and ends the customer waiting effect control process. To do.

  In step S3001-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu screen is being displayed (the menu screen shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 is displayed). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu screen is being displayed, step S3001 is performed. The process moves to -6, and if it is determined that the menu screen is not being displayed, the process moves to step S3001-8.

  In step S3001-6, the sub CPU 102a receives a detection signal from a preset menu screen display time (for example, after starting the menu screen display, the effect button detection switch 18a and the cross key detection switches 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a). If it is determined that it is within the menu screen display time, the customer waiting effect control process is terminated. If it is determined that it is not within the menu screen display time, step S3001- The processing is moved to 7.

  In step S3001-7, the sub CPU 102a terminates the display of the menu screen, and instead performs a process of displaying a screen waiting for a customer, such as a customer waiting effect waiting image, a customer waiting effect waiting image 1021, and the like. The effect control process ends.

  In step S3001-8, the sub CPU 102a detects a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 18a and the cross key detection switches 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a within a preset demonstration screen display standby time (for example, after the customer wait state starts). If it is determined that it is within the demonstration screen display standby time, the customer waiting effect control process is terminated, and if it is determined that it is not within the demonstration screen display standby time, The process moves to step S3001-9.

  In step S3001-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration screen is being displayed. If it is determined that the demonstration screen is being displayed, the sub CPU 102a terminates the step customer waiting effect control process and determines that the demonstration screen is not being displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3001-10.

  In step S3001-10, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of displaying the demonstration effect image 1011 in place of the customer waiting effect standby image, and ends the customer waiting effect control process.

(Specific examples of effects when the opening effect of the timer effect is started while the menu screen is displayed)
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, an effect when the opening effect of the timer effect is started while the menu screen is being displayed in the waiting state of the customer (during the non-execution of the change effect) will be described.

  In the first period after the customer waiting effect standby image is displayed on the image display device 14 in the customer waiting state (during the non-execution of the changing effect), the sub CPU 102a performs (m− The effect which displays the demonstration screen of 1-1) on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the first period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-1-1) of FIG. .

  Also, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period for validating the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A in the first period, and (m−1) in FIG. As shown in -1), the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are controlled so as not to emit light. When the volume value of the effect sound can be changed based on the operation of the cross key operation unit 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A in the customer waiting state (during non-execution of the changing effect) In the first period, an operation effective period for enabling the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is set, and the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light. You may make it control to a state.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A before the start time of the timer effect opening effect in the customer waiting state (during the non-execution of the changing effect), so that the customer waiting effect control process is performed. Steps S3001-1 → S3001-2 → S3001-3 → S3001-4 are satisfied, and the condition for displaying the menu screen is established. In the second period following the first period, (m−1 As shown in -2), effect control for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 14 is performed.

  Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period for validating the operation of the cross key operation units 191A and 193A of the cross key 190A in the second period, as shown in (m-1-2) of FIG. In FIG. 87 (m-1-2), the cross key operation units 191A and 193A are caused to emit light and the operation valid period for enabling the operation of the cross key operation units 192A and 194A of the cross key 190A is not set. As shown, the cross key operation units 192A and 194A are controlled so as not to emit light.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the second period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-1-2) of FIG. .

  When the start time of the timer effect opening effect is reached, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for displaying the timer effect start image (specific effect display) on the image control board 105. As a result, the specific image priority display process of the overall CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105 becomes a flow of steps S2001 → S2002 → S2003 → S2006, and the overall CPU 105Aa prioritizes the timer effect start image over the menu image on the menu screen in the image display device 14. (So that the viewing of the menu image is regulated by the timer effect start image). As a result, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa display the timer effect start image (specific effect display) as a menu in the third period following the second period as shown in (m-1-3) of FIG. The display is overlapped on the front side of the image (menu display), and effect control is performed to output a predetermined operation sound. Although a part of the menu image is hidden by the timer effect start image in a visible state, the entire button operation promotion image may be hidden.

  Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A and 193A of the cross key 190A is valid in the third period, as shown in (m-1-3) of FIG. In FIG. 88 (m-1-3), the cross key operation units 191A and 193A are caused to emit light and the operation valid period for enabling the operation of the cross key operation units 192A and 194A of the cross key 190A is not set. As shown, the cross key operation units 192A and 194A are controlled so as not to emit light.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the third period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-1-3) of FIG. .

  Here, when the sub CPU 102a performs a predetermined operation on at least one of the cross key operation units 191A and 193A and the effect button 18A of the cross key 190A in the state shown in FIG. 88 (m-1-3). In the fourth period following the third period, as shown in (m-1-4) of FIG. 88, the sound volume of the effect sound is displayed on the menu screen while the state of the visual recognition being restricted by the timer effect start image. And it updates to the adjustment screen for brightness adjustment of the backlight of the image display device 14 and the lighting device 16 for production. In this case, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa display the timer effect start image with priority over the adjustment image on the adjustment screen (so that the adjustment image on the adjustment screen is regulated by the timer effect start image). As shown in 88 (m-1-4), the timer effect start image is displayed in an overlapped manner on the front side with respect to the adjusted image, and effect control is performed to output a predetermined operation sound. Although a part of the adjustment image on the adjustment screen is hidden by the timer effect start image in a visible state, the entire adjustment image on the adjustment screen may be hidden.

Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is valid in the fourth period, and (m-1-4) in FIG. ), The cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light.
Further, in the fourth period, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period for validating the operation of the effect button 18A, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-1-4) of FIG.

  Thereafter, when the opening effect of the timer effect ends in the state shown in (m-1-4) of FIG. 88, the sub CPU 102a ends the display of the timer effect start image, and the fifth period following the fourth period. In the period, as shown in (m-1-5) in FIG. 88, effect control is performed to completely display the adjustment screen for adjusting the volume and the luminance.

Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is valid in the fifth period, and (m-1-5) in FIG. ), The cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light.
Further, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the fifth period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-1-5) of FIG. .

(Specific example of production when menu screen display is started during opening production of timer production)
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, an effect when the menu screen display is started during the opening effect of the timer effect in the customer waiting state (while the changing effect is not being executed) will be described.

The sub CPU 102a displays a timer effect start image (specific effect display) on the image control board 105 when the start time of the timer effect opening effect is reached during the display of the demonstration screen in the waiting state of the customer (during the non-execution of the change effect). Send a command to display. As a result, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa, as shown in (m-2-1) in FIG. 89, in the first period that is the first period when the opening effect start time is reached, the image display device 14 The effect control for displaying the demo image on the demo screen and the timer effect start image (specific effect display) in an overlapping manner is performed. In this case, the demonstration image on the demonstration screen and the timer effect start image (specific effect display) are partially overlapped, and the timer effect start image is displayed in front of the demo image in the overlapped portion.
Further, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the first period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-2-1) of FIG. .
Also, the sub CPU 102a does not set an operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A (operation means) of the cross key 190A is valid in the first period, as shown in FIG. As shown in (m-2-1), the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are controlled so as not to emit light. When the volume value of the effect sound can be changed based on the operation of the cross key operation unit 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A in the customer waiting state (during non-execution of the changing effect) In the first period, an operation effective period for enabling the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is set, and the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light. You may make it control to a state.

  In the second period following the first period, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A as shown in (m-2-2) of FIG. 89 so that the customer waiting effect control process is performed in step S3001. -1 → S3001-2 → S3001-3 → S3001-4, and the condition for displaying the menu screen is satisfied. Accordingly, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for ending the display of the demo image on the demo screen and displaying the menu image on the menu screen on the image control board 105, so that the third period following the second period. As shown in (m-2-3) of FIG. 90, the display of the demonstration image on the demonstration screen is ended and the menu image on the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 14. In this state, the specific image priority display process of the central CPU 105Aa of the central unit 105A of the image control board 105 is a flow of steps S2001 → S2002 → S2003 → S2004 → S2006, and the central CPU 105Aa The specific effect display) is displayed with priority over the menu image (menu display) on the menu screen (so that the viewing of the menu image is regulated by the timer effect start image). As a result, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa overlap the timer effect start image on the front side of the menu image (menu display) as shown in (m-2-3) of FIG. 90 in the third period. The display control is performed, and the production control for outputting a predetermined operation sound is performed. Although a part of the menu image is hidden by the timer effect start image in a visible state, the entire button operation promotion image may be hidden. Note that even when the condition for displaying the menu screen is satisfied, the display of the demonstration image on the demonstration screen may be continued without being terminated.

  Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A and 193A of the cross key 190A is valid in the third period, as shown in (m-2-3) of FIG. 90 (m-2-3) in FIG. 90 without setting the operation valid period for causing the cross key operation units 191A and 193A to emit light and enabling the operation of the cross key operation units 192A and 194A of the cross key 190A. As shown, the cross key operation units 192A and 194A are controlled so as not to emit light.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the third period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-2-3) of FIG. .

  Here, when a predetermined operation is performed on the cross key operation unit 191A and the effect button 18A of the cross key 190A in the state illustrated in FIG. 90 (m-2-3), the sub CPU 102a performs the third period. In the subsequent fourth period, as shown in (m-2-4) of FIG. 90, the menu screen is updated to the adjustment screen for volume and brightness adjustment while the visual recognition is restricted by the timer effect start image. Then, the sub CPU 102a and the general CPU 105Aa display the timer effect start image with priority over the adjustment image on the adjustment screen (so that the adjustment image on the adjustment screen is regulated by the timer effect start image), thereby displaying the timer effect. The start image is displayed in an overlapped manner on the front side with respect to the adjusted image, and effect control is performed to output a predetermined operation sound. Although a part of the adjustment image on the adjustment screen is hidden by the timer effect start image in a visible state, the entire adjustment image on the adjustment screen may be hidden.

Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is valid in the fourth period, and (m-2-4 in FIG. 90). ), The cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light.
Further, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled in the fourth period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-2-4) of FIG. .

  Thereafter, when the opening effect of the timer effect ends in the state shown in (m-2-4) of FIG. 90, the sub CPU 102a ends the display of the timer effect start image, and the fifth time following the fourth period. In this period, as shown in (m-2-5) in FIG. 90, effect control for completely displaying the adjustment screen for adjusting the volume and the brightness is performed.

Also, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A of the cross key 190A is valid in the fifth period, and (m-2-5 in FIG. 90). ), The cross key operation units 191A, 192A, 193A, 194A are caused to emit light.
In addition, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid in the fifth period, and causes the effect button 18A to emit light as shown in (m-2-5) of FIG. .

In the present embodiment, on the adjustment screen shown in FIGS. 88 and 90, various settings of the gaming machine can be performed in accordance with operations by the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A.
In the present embodiment, in the menu display shown in FIGS. 87, 88, and 90, a plurality of display contents are switched and displayed in accordance with operations performed by the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A. As a plurality of display contents in this case, display of an image of each selection item such as display of an adjustment screen for volume and luminance adjustment, patch log display, and termination is used. In the state in which the effect control is performed in which the specific effect display (timer effect start image) is displayed in front of the menu image (menu display), the menu image is updated while being hidden by the specific effect display.

(Development notice A4 related to the normal variation production pattern A036 (first jackpot))
Hereinafter, the advance notice A4 related to the normal variation effect pattern A036 (first jackpot) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The sub CPU 102a starts “super reach A1-3” in the variation effect pattern A036, as shown in (n-1-1) of FIG. 91, at the predetermined timing of the variation effect pattern A036. Special effect design (left design and right design) is stopped and effect control is performed to execute the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect in which “Character a3 (A child)” appears on the image display device 14. .

  Next, as shown in (n-1-2) of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A of the advance notice A4 in the change effect pattern A036 5.0 seconds after the start of “super reach A1-3”. In order to perform an effect involving the effect button 18A, an operation valid period for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A is set, and a button operation promotion image (first operation promotion display) is displayed on the image display device 14 and a light emitting diode for an effect button Effect control is performed to cause the effect button 18A to emit light (second operation promotion display) by emitting light 18c. Further, in the “development notice A4”, the effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state during the operation effective period.

Next, if the effect button 18A is not operated from the start 0.0 second to the start 0.5 second of the operation effective period, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period as shown in (n-1-3) of FIG. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the second decorative member 17B is moved as the movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2-1,” and the button operation promotion image (first operation promotion display) of the image display device 14 is displayed. ), And effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound. Although the button operation promotion image is completely hidden by the second decoration member 17B, a part of the button operation promotion image may be made visible.

  Here, as shown in (n-1-4) of FIG. 92, the second decoration member 17B is overlapped on the front side of the first operation promotion display, and the start of the operation valid period is 1.5 seconds. When the button 18A is operated, the sub CPU 102a transmits a command for executing an operation effect to the ramp control board 104 and the image control board 105. Thereby, the sub CPU 102a moves the second decorative member 17B from the “operation position 2-1” to the “standby position 2” as shown in (n-1-5) of FIG. Thereafter, as shown in (n-1-6) in FIG. 93, the sub CPU 102a moves from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” as an operation-related effect, and effects a4 on the screen of the display device 14. And effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound. When this operation-corresponding effect is completed, the sub CPU 102a performs special reach effect control in the variable effect pattern A036.

  Also, the sub CPU 102a starts from the state shown in (n-1-2) in FIG. 91 and starts from 0.0 second from the start of the operation valid period, as shown in (n-1-7) in FIG. When the effect button 18A is operated by the second, a command for executing the operation effect is transmitted to the ramp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  As a result, the sub CPU 102a and the overall CPU 105Aa move the second decorative member 17B from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2” as an operation corresponding effect as shown in (n-1-8) of FIG. The effect a4 is displayed on the screen of the display device 14, and the effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound is performed. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102a performs special reach effect control in the variation effect pattern A036.

  If the effect button 18A is not operated from the state shown in (n-1-3) of FIG. 92 to the timing of 1.5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period, the sub CPU 102a n-1-9), the second decorative member 17B is moved from the “operation position 2-1” to the “standby position 2” regardless of the operation of the effect button 18A, and the button operation promotion image is displayed by the player. To make it visible. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the remaining operation effective period (within 3 seconds after the start of the operation effective period), the sub CPU 102a causes the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to execute the operation effect. Send commands for Thereby, as shown in (n-1-10) of FIG. 94, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation corresponding effect similar to (n-1-8) of FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102a performs special reach effect control in the variation effect pattern A036.

  If the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period from 0.0 second to 3.0 seconds (during the operation effective period), the sub CPU 102a is the same as (n-1-8) in FIG. Perform operation-related effects. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102a performs special reach effect control in the variation effect pattern A036.

  In the advance notice A4 shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, after the button operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 14, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2-1”. The second decoration member 17B is overlapped on the front side of the button operation promotion image, but the button operation promotion image is displayed after the second decoration member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2-1.” The second decoration member 17B may be overlapped on the front side of the button operation promotion image.

  ◇ As described above, the gaming machine Y performs a variable display by display means (image display device) in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game is displayed in response to the special display result being derived as a result of the variable display. In the gaming machine that is in a special gaming state advantageous to the user, the movable member (second decorative member 17B) that can move to the front surface of the display means, the variation effect related to the variation display, and the establishment of the movement condition, An effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a movable effect related to the movement of the movable member, an operation means (effect button) operable by the player, and an operation display means (effect button light emitting diode) are configured. An operation means for effect (effect button device), and when the effect control means prompts the player to operate the effect operation means during the execution of the change effect, the player is prompted to operate the effect operation means. A first operation promotion display (button operation promotion image display) is displayed on the display means, and a second operation promotion display (the effect button 18A is lit) that prompts the player to operate the effect operation means is displayed for the operation. After executing the operation promotion display to be displayed on the means, the operation corresponding effect according to the operation of the effect operation means is executed, and when the movement condition is satisfied during the operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display The moving member is moved to a position overlapping with the above, and the operation corresponding effect (the second decoration member 17B is moved to “operation position 2”, the effect a4 is generated on the screen, in accordance with the operation of the effect operating means, predetermined ).

  In this way, the gaming machine Y moves the moving member to a position overlapping the first operation promotion display when the movement condition is satisfied while the operation promotion display is being executed. By performing the operation corresponding effect according to the operation, it is possible to diversify the effects when the first operation promotion display displayed on the display means and other effects are combined, and to improve the fun of the game Offering a machine.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y performs variable display by display means (image display device) in response to establishment of a predetermined condition, and in response to the special display result being derived as a result of the variable display. In the gaming machine that is in a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the effect of executing the change effect related to the change display and the specific effect (timer effect start image) different from the change effect according to the establishment of the start condition. Effect operation means (effect button device) comprising control means (sub CPU, general CPU), operation means (effect button) operable by the player, and operation display means (effect button light emitting diode). The presentation control means, when prompting the player to operate the presentation operation means during the execution of the fluctuation presentation, provides a first operation promotion display (button) to prompt the player to operate the presentation operation means. An operation promotion image display) is displayed on the display means, and a second operation promotion display for prompting a player to operate the effect operation means (the effect button 18A is emitted) is displayed on the operation display means. After performing the above, when an operation corresponding display (an operation effect image by cut-in of a character) is displayed on the display unit and the specific effect is executed, the specific response corresponding to the specific effect is performed. When the effect display is displayed on the display means and the start condition is satisfied while the operation promotion display is being executed, the specification is made to overlap the front side of the first operation promotion display displayed on the display means. An effect display is displayed, the second operation promotion display is continued, and the operation corresponding display is displayed on the display unit in response to an operation of the effect operation unit.

  As described above, when the start condition for the specific effect display is established during the execution of the operation promotion display, the gaming machine Y overlaps the front side of the first operation promotion display displayed on the display unit and displays the specific effect display. , The second operation promotion display by the operation display means is continued, and the operation corresponding display is displayed on the display means according to the operation of the effect operation means, whereby the first operation displayed on the display means is displayed. There is provided a gaming machine that can diversify the effects when the promotion display and other effects are combined, and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y performs variable display by display means (image display device) in response to establishment of a predetermined condition, and in response to the special display result being derived as a result of the variable display. In the gaming machine that is in a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the effect of executing the change effect related to the change display and the specific effect (timer effect start image) different from the change effect according to the establishment of the start condition. Effect operation means (effect button device) comprising control means (sub CPU, general CPU), operation means (effect button) operable by the player, and operation display means (effect button light emitting diode). The presentation control means, when prompting the player to operate the presentation operation means during the execution of the fluctuation presentation, provides a first operation promotion display (button) to prompt the player to operate the presentation operation means. An operation promotion image display) is displayed on the display means, and a second operation promotion display for prompting a player to operate the effect operation means (the effect button 18A is emitted) is displayed on the operation display means. After performing the above, when an operation corresponding display (an operation effect image by cut-in of a character) is displayed on the display unit and the specific effect is executed, the specific response corresponding to the specific effect is performed. When the effect display is displayed on the display means and the operation promotion display is executed while the specific effect display is being displayed, the first effect display is displayed on the front so that the specific effect display displayed on the display means is displayed on the front. The operation promotion display is displayed in an overlapping manner, the second operation promotion display is displayed on the operation display means, and the display means is displayed in advance according to the operation of the effect operation means. Displaying an operation corresponding display.

  Thus, when the gaming machine Y performs the operation promotion display while displaying the specific effect display, the gaming machine Y overlaps the first operation promotion display so that the specific effect display displayed on the display means is displayed on the front. Display the second operation promotion display on the operation display means, and display the operation corresponding display on the display means according to the operation of the production operation means. There is provided a gaming machine capable of diversifying effects when combining one operation promotion display and other effects and improving the interest of the game.

In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y performs variable display by display means (image display device) in response to establishment of a predetermined condition, and in response to the special display result being derived as a result of the variable display. In the gaming machine that is in a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the effect control for executing the change effect related to the change display and the specific effect (timer effect start) different from the change effect according to the establishment of the start condition. Means (sub CPU, general CPU) and operation means (effect button 18A, cross key 190A) that can be operated by a player, and the effect control means, during non-execution of the variation effect, the operation means It is possible to display on the display means a menu display in which a plurality of display contents are switched in response to an operation by the user, and when executing the specific effect, the specific display corresponding to the specific effect is performed. When the start condition is satisfied while the menu display is being displayed, the output display (timer effect start image display) is displayed on the display means, and the specific effect display is displayed overlapping the front of the menu display. At the same time, the plurality of display contents are switched and displayed according to the operation of the operation means.
In this way, the gaming machine Y displays the specific effect display overlapping the front side of the menu display when the start condition of the specific effect is satisfied while the menu display is displayed, and the operation means is operated. Accordingly, by providing a display of a plurality of display contents in response, a gaming machine capable of achieving both the operation for switching and displaying the plurality of display contents of the menu display and the specific effect and improving the fun of the game. doing.

(Modification of this embodiment)
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 94, the effect button device 18 is used as the effect operation means composed of the operation means operable by the player and the operation display means. In the modification, an effect lever device 19 is used as the effect operating means. In addition, the effect lever device 19 uses an effect lever 19A, and the operation display means of the effect lever device 19 uses a light emitting diode provided on the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the “development notice A4” at the normal time in the present modification, the second decorative member 17B is set to “standby” as a movable member before a single downward operation of the effect lever 19A is detected. The position is moved from “position 2” to “operation position 2-1” and overlapped with the first operation promotion display ((a-3-3) in FIG. 72) of the effect lever device 19. When the downward tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period of the effect lever device 19, the effect button 18 of the effect button device 18 shown in FIGS. 93 and 94 is operated. Perform the same operation.
Even in such a modification, the same effects as those of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 94 can be obtained.

  In this embodiment, the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image as the specific effect display are displayed on the front side of the button operation promotion image as the first operation promotion display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first operation promotion display is displayed as to whether or not to display the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image on the front side of the button operation promotion image. You may decide according to a kind.

  For example, if the trigger for displaying the first operation promotion display is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing a jackpot game such as a serif notice, a character notice, or a development notice, a button displayed on the image display device 14 A notification effect such that a timer effect start image and a timer effect end image are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image, and a trigger for displaying the first operation promotion display is determined and a decision of winning a big hit such as a determination effect is notified. In this case, the back side of the button operation promotion image displayed on the image display device 14 or a position that does not overlap or substantially does not overlap the button operation promotion image (for example, when two image display devices are provided) Alternatively, the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image may be displayed on the image display device on which the button operation promotion image is not displayed.

  In addition, even when the trigger for displaying the first operation promotion display is a notice effect, in the case of a confirmed notice effect in which the jackpot game is to be executed (notice), the image display device 14 On the back side of the button operation promotion image displayed on the screen, or a position that does not overlap or almost does not overlap the button operation promotion image (for example, when two image display devices are provided, the button operation promotion image is displayed. The timer effect start image and the timer effect end image may be displayed on the image display device that is not provided.

  Further, when the trigger for displaying the first operation promotion display is a notification effect or a final notice effect, the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image are displayed even when the timer effect start time or the timer effect end time is reached. 14 may be displayed on the image display device 14 in the case of one of the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image, but in the other case of the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image. You may make it not display on the image display apparatus 14. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the timer effect start image and the timer effect end image are used as the specific effect display displayed on the front side of the first operation promotion display (the button operation promotion image shown in FIGS. 76 and 77). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, an image displayed during the timer effect, an error display (error notification display image), or the like may be used.

  Further, when the specific effect display displayed on the front side of the first operation promotion display is an error display, whether or not the operation of the effect operation means (the effect button 18A) is to be enabled (operation effective period) is determined. It may be determined according to the type of error display.

  For example, a right-handed error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched in the right region of the game area 2A in the normal game state, and the saucer 50 is filled with the game ball. In the case of a non-illegal system display such as a pan full error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting that the display has become tangled, the operating means for the effect (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A are displayed during the error display. ) Is activated to execute the second operation promotion display (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A emit light), and if there is an operation of the operation means for the operation, an operation corresponding display (display of the operation effect image by the cut-in of the character) ) Can be displayed on the display means (image display device), and the image display device is detected by detecting an abnormal radio wave whose error display exceeds a predetermined threshold value. 4, an abnormal radio wave detection error display, an abnormal magnetic force detection error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting an abnormal magnetic force (magnetism) exceeding a predetermined threshold, the second start opening 7 and the big prize opening In the case of an illegal display such as an abnormal winning error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting the winning of the game ball at the second starting opening 7 or the big winning opening 8 during the closing period of 8 During the display, the operation of the effect operating means (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A) is disabled and the second operation promotion display is not executed, and the operation corresponding display according to the operation of the effect operating means (by character cut-in) The display of the operation effect image) may not be displayed on the display means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an image effect by the image display device 14 (operation effect image by character cut-in, switching display of menu image on the menu screen) is used as an operation corresponding display according to the operation of the effect operating means. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a light guide plate effect, a gimmick effect, a sub liquid crystal effect, a frame lamp effect, or the like may be used. These operation-corresponding displays are executed on the front side (the front layer, the front side position) from the image display device 14 so as not to be hidden by the specific effect display.

Further, the effect button 18A during execution of the change effect can be changed between a normal state and a protruding state (see (e-2-1) in FIG. 80, FIG. 85). In the protruding state, the first operation is performed. A specific effect display may be displayed on the back side of the promotion display.
Further, during the operation effective period of the effect button 18A of the determined effect (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 80), the specific effect display may be displayed on the back side of the first operation promotion display. May not be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect start end image and the timer effect end image are used as the specific effect display that is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the menu display shown in FIGS. 88 and 90, but is not limited thereto. For example, an image in the middle of a timer effect, an error notification display image, or the like may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific effect display that is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the menu display shown in FIGS. 88 and 90 is an error display, the operation means for the effect (the effect button 18A) is displayed during the error display. Whether to enable the operation of the cross key 190A) may be determined according to the type of error display.

  For example, a right-handed error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched in the right region of the game area 2A in the normal game state, and the saucer 50 is filled with the game ball. In the case of a non-illegal system display such as a pan full error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting that the display has become tangled, the operating means for the effect (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A are displayed during the error display. ) Is enabled, the second operation promotion display is performed (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A are lit), and the operation means for the operation is operated, the plurality of display contents of the menu display can be switched and displayed. And an abnormal radio wave detection error displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting an abnormal radio wave whose error display exceeds a predetermined threshold, and a predetermined threshold value. The abnormal magnetic force detection error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting the abnormal magnetic force (magnetism), the second start opening 7 and the big winning opening 8 during the closing period of the second starting opening 7 and the big winning opening 8 In the case of an illegal display such as an abnormal winning error display displayed on the image display device 14 by detecting the winning of the game ball to the player, the operating means for the effect (the effect button 18A and the cross key 190A are displayed during the error display. ) May be disabled so that the second operation promotion display is not executed, and a plurality of display contents of the menu display cannot be switched and displayed.

  If the error display is a right-handed error display or a pan full error display, the menu display is continued while the error is displayed, and the operation of the operation means for rendering is enabled, so that a plurality of display contents of the menu display can be displayed. When the error display is an abnormal radio wave detection error display, abnormal magnetic force detection error display, or abnormal winning error display, the menu display is terminated and the operation of the production operation means is disabled. A plurality of display contents of the menu display may not be switched and displayed.

  Further, when the error display is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the menu display, the menu display is continued during the error display regardless of the type of the error that has occurred, but the operation means for the effect (the effect button 18A or the cross key). By disabling the operation 190A), a plurality of display contents of the menu display may not be switched and displayed.

  In addition, the menu display is partially displayed in the effect control in which the specific effect display (timer effect start completion image, timer effect end image, error display, etc.) is displayed in front of the menu display (menu image). Alternatively, all of the menu display may be hidden in the specific effect display.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the jackpot expectation is calculated using the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of pseudo sound output of the effect button 18A that vibrates, and the presence / absence of the image display of the effect button 18A. Although it is suggested, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the size of the image of the effect button 18A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the volume of output sound, or the like may be used. Further, the sound output in the specific effect may not be a pseudo sound of the effect button 18A that vibrates, but may be a sound effect specific to the specific effect, a specific speech, or the like. When performing a specific effect, a plurality of types of sounds may be output, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the type of sound to be output.

  In addition, the specific effect may be performed not by the vibration of the effect button 18A but by the vibration of the effect lever 19A, or by the lighting or flashing of the LED incorporated in the effect button 18A, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A. The effect may be shown as if 18A is operating. Further, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 18A, and the expectation of jackpot may be suggested based on the presence / absence of the operation of the object and the speed of the operation. Moreover, a specific effect may be performed by rotating the effect button 18A, and the degree of expectation of jackpot may be suggested depending on the presence / absence of rotation, the rotation speed, and the rotation direction. Further, a specific effect may be performed by projecting the effect button 18A.

  In the present embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state that is the normal gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state (when in the presentation mode A), as shown in FIGS. 48 to 49, the presentation is the first operation means. The ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 18A is higher than the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means. On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability gaming state that is the specific gaming state and the short-time gaming state (when the rendering modes are B to D), as shown in FIGS. 51 to 58, the operation of the effect lever 19A that is the second operating means is performed. The ratio of performing the prompting operation notification is higher than the ratio of performing the prompting operation prompting the operation of the effect button 18A as the first operation means. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A, and in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect lever 19A. . Thereby, the pleasure which the operation means selects according to the game state can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is different from the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance lever 19A. For example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed without performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, or the high-probability game. In the state and the short-time gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. In addition, for example, in the low probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed, but in the high-probability gaming state and the time-short gaming state. Instead of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18A is used as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operation means. The effect button 18A may be used as the operation means. Further, as the first operation means and the second operation means, an effect button different from the effect button 18A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, or the like may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and the player uses the effect lever 19A in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. The frequency of doing is increasing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect button 18A and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect lever 19A are different in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, for example, in the first half period and the second half period. You may make it let. In the present embodiment, for example, in the production mode B, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production button 18A as the first operation means is urged to operate the production lever 19A as the second operation means. It is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification, and when in the production mode C, the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance lever 19A is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance button 18A. To do. Further, in the effect mode D, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is made higher than that in the effect mode C. Thereby, the interest of the game when it is a high probability game state and a short time game state can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to execute a reach effect using only the effect button 18A and a reach effect using only the effect lever 19A, and the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect button 18A is low in the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state. In a high and high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, the production includes a production dedicated to the production button 18A and a production dedicated to the production lever 19A. In the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the production frequency of the production button 18A-specific production is high, and the high-probability gaming state and In the short-time gaming state, the appearance frequency of the effect dedicated to the effect lever 19A may be increased.

  In addition, in the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts a plurality of operations of the effect button 18A, such as “Please press the button repeatedly”. Count once. For example, even if there is one operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A five times, if there is two operation promotion notifications that prompt the user to operate the effect lever 19A, the player uses the effect button 18A. It can be said that the frequency of using the effect lever 19A is higher than the frequency of performing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are two operation means, that is, the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may have a kind of operation means. In the case of having three or more types of operation means, the frequency of use of each operation means (appearance ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of each operation means) may be varied depending on the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state as the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state as the specific gaming state. A gaming state such as a stochastic gaming state and a short-time gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state may correspond to the specific gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, when the timer effect start time that is a predetermined start condition is reached and the timer effect flag is turned ON, a timer effect that is a specific effect is performed (see FIG. 34 and the like). At least during the timer effect, the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means is not performed, and only the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means can be executed (FIG. 50). Refer to FIG. Thereby, at the time of a specific performance, it is possible to reduce the player's operation burden by using a plurality of operation means and to make the player pay attention to the content of the performance, and thus it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  In the present embodiment, at least during the timer effect, the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means is not performed, and only the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means can be executed. Yes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least during the timer effect, the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is not performed, and only the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means can be executed. May be. In this case, for example, in each table of FIG. 50, the operation buttons that are effective for operation are only the effect buttons, and in FIG. .

  Also, a plurality of types of timer effects are provided, and depending on the type of timer effects, only one of the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is provided. It may be executable. For example, if there is a timer effect A and a timer effect B, in the timer effect A, the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means is not performed, and the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is not performed. Can only be executed. On the other hand, in the timer effect B, the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is not performed, and only the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means can be executed.

  Further, in the timer effect, not only the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means can be executed, but the execution frequency May be different. For example, when it is not at the time of the timer effect, the execution rate of the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means is 60%, and the execution rate of the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is 4 Let's do it. On the other hand, at the time of the timer effect, the execution rate of the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means is 10%, and the execution rate of the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is 90%. .

  In this embodiment, a timer effect is performed as a specific effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect in a specific game state (for example, a high-probability game state and a short-time game state) or a specific game mode ( For example, the production in the production mode B) and the production during the jackpot game may be set as the specific production. Further, it may be a specific reach effect or an effect in the second half of the reach effect. When such a specific effect is executed, only one of the operation promotion notification of the effect button 18A as the first operation means or the operation promotion notification of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, as the operation corresponding effects shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the movable member (second decorative member 17B) shown in FIG. 92 is moved from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2”. While effect a4 is displayed on the screen of display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and predetermined effect sound is output, the following other examples may be used as operation-related effects.

  As another example of the operation-corresponding effect, a predetermined effect image (for example, a character cut) is displayed on the screen of the display device (main liquid crystal) 14 without moving the movable member (second decorative member 17B) from the “standby position 2”. (In-image, character image, etc.) may be displayed and effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound may be performed.

  Further, as another example of the operation-corresponding effect, the movable member (second decorative member 17B) is not moved from the “standby position 2”, and the effect device (light guide plate effect device, frame lamp) positioned in front of the movable member. Etc.) and effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound while displaying a predetermined effect image on the display device (main liquid crystal) 14 screen.

  As another example of the operation-corresponding effect, a movable member having display means (including a sub liquid crystal) for performing screen display is provided, and the movable member is moved from the “standby position” to the “operating position” to move the movable member. In addition to displaying a predetermined effect image on the display means provided in the apparatus, it is possible to perform effect control for outputting a predetermined effect sound.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18A during the execution of the variable effect can be changed between a normal state and a protruding state (see (e-2-1) in FIG. 80, FIG. 85). The movable member (second decorative member 17B) shown in FIG. 92 may or may not be moved to a position overlapping the front side of the first operation promotion display.

  In addition, during the operation effective period of the effect button 18A of the determined effect (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 80), the movable member (second decorative member 17B) shown in FIG. 92 is displayed on the front surface of the first operation promotion display. Even if it moves to the position which overlaps to the side, it is not necessary to move.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is finished, the specific game advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state). A state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. It was described as “ST machine”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or the high probability gaming state continues, for example, 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal jackpot” in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a low probability gaming state.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period during which the special symbol after the jackpot game is fluctuated from 1 to 99 times is referred to as the “first period” described above, and the jackpot game The period in which the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol is 100 times or more may be set as the “second period”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period during the variation effect in the “second period” at a higher rate than the “first period”.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a jigyan ball gaming machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

<About other inventions described in the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions described in the above embodiment will be described.
The other inventions described below include those that can be independently established as inventions, and those that can be combined with other inventions.

(A) In a gaming machine that performs a variable display by a display means according to establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special display result is derived as a result of the variable display, so that a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. A variation production related to the variation display, a production control means for executing a specific production different from the fluctuation production in response to establishment of a start condition, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation display means A first operation for urging the player to operate the operation means when the operation control means prompts the operation of the effect operation means during execution of the variation effect. After executing the operation promotion display for causing the display means to display a second operation promotion display for causing the player to operate the presentation operation means, and to display the promotion display on the display means. When displaying the operation corresponding display according to the operation on the display means and executing the specific effect, the specific effect display according to the specific effect is displayed on the display means, and the operation promotion display is being executed. When the start condition is satisfied, the specific effect display is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side with respect to the first operation promotion display displayed on the display means, and the second operation promotion display is continued, and the effect is displayed. A game machine, wherein the display corresponding to the operation is displayed on the display unit in response to an operation of the operation unit for operation.
(B) In a gaming machine that performs a variable display by a display means according to establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special display result is derived as a result of the variable display, and a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, A variation production related to the variation display, a production control means for executing a specific production different from the fluctuation production in response to establishment of a start condition, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation display means A first operation for urging the player to operate the operation means when the operation control means prompts the operation of the effect operation means during execution of the variation effect. After executing the operation promotion display for causing the display means to display a second operation promotion display for causing the player to operate the presentation operation means, and to display the promotion display on the display means. When displaying the operation corresponding display according to the operation on the display means and executing the specific effect, the specific effect display according to the specific effect is displayed on the display means, and the specific effect display is being displayed. When the operation promotion display is executed, the first operation promotion display is displayed in an overlapping manner so that the specific effect display displayed on the display unit is displayed on the front, and the second operation promotion display is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on an operation display means, and the operation corresponding display is displayed on the display means in accordance with an operation of the production operation means.
(C) In a gaming machine that performs a variable display by display means in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special display result is derived as a result of the variable display, and in a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, The effect control means comprises: a change effect related to the change display; an effect control means for executing a specific effect different from the change effect according to establishment of a start condition; and an operation means operable by a player. Is capable of causing the display means to display a menu display in which a plurality of display contents are switched and displayed in accordance with an operation by the operation means during the non-execution of the fluctuation effect, and executing the specific effect When a specific effect display corresponding to the specific effect is displayed on the display means and the start condition is satisfied while the menu display is displayed, the display is overlapped on the front side of the menu display. Serial with displaying the specific effect display, a game machine, characterized in that to switch displays the plurality of display contents in accordance with an operation of said operation means.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 big winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decorative member (Movable member)
17B Second decorative member (movable member)
17C Third decorative member (movable member)
18A effect button (first operation means)
19A Production lever (second operating means)
70 Second starting port control device 80 Big prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

Gaming machine according to the first invention, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the gaming machine comprising determining means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous special game state for the player, Starring output control means, said based on the determination result by the determining means, and display means to display change effect, and can execute the moving effect of the movable member, and capable of controlling the operating means operable by the player, SL before during execution of the fluctuation effect If prompting the operation of the operation means, the predetermined time period on said display means a first operation promoting display effect prompting the player operation of the operating means, together with the display, the second operation prompting the operation of the pre-SL operating means to the player the predetermined period of accelerated display effect, is displayed before Symbol operating means, when said operating means to the predetermined time period is operated, to perform the operation effect, at least partially overlaps positioned in the first operating accelerator display effect In When the second operation promotion display effect is displayed on the operation means while the movable member is moved, and the second member is moved to a position not overlapping with the first operation promotion display effect. An operation promotion display effect may be displayed on the operation means .

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that performs a variable display by a display means according to establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special display result is derived as a result of the variable display, and in a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
A movable member movable to the front surface of the display means;
An effect control means for executing the change effect related to the change display and the move effect related to the movement of the movable member in accordance with the establishment of the moving condition;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means for production composed of display means for operation.
The production control means includes
When the operation of the effect operation means is urged during execution of the variation effect, a first operation promotion display that prompts the player to operate the effect operation means is displayed on the display means, and the effect operation means After executing the operation promotion display for causing the operation display means to display a second operation promotion display that prompts the player to perform an operation, an operation corresponding effect according to the operation of the effect operation means is executed,
When the movement condition is satisfied during execution of the operation promotion display, the movable member is moved to a position overlapping the first operation promotion display, and the operation corresponding effect is displayed according to the operation of the operation means for effect. Run,
A gaming machine characterized by that.